IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | (music playing)
| | 00:04 | Hi and welcome to Windows 8
Essential Training. I'm David Rivers.
| | 00:08 | Microsoft Windows has gone through yet
another major makeover and in this course,
| | 00:11 | we'll get you up to speed on the essential
features and functions of Windows 8.
| | 00:16 | So you'll feel comfortable
in this new environment.
| | 00:18 | We'll begin by exploring what it takes
to get upgraded to Windows 8 and then
| | 00:23 | examine ways to transfer files from
your existing Windows installation to the
| | 00:27 | new Windows 8 environment.
| | 00:29 | We'll get you comfortable navigating
the new metro style user interface before
| | 00:33 | opening up the file explorer to work
with the new Ribbon interface to manipulate
| | 00:37 | your files and folders.
| | 00:38 | We'll also be working with many of the
Windows apps included in Windows 8 like
| | 00:43 | mail, photos, music, and video.
| | 00:48 | Other topics to be covered include
customizing your system settings to suit
| | 00:52 | your individual needs, devices and
networking, Windows security and printing.
| | 00:58 | We have a lot to cover so let's get
started with Windows 8 Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you're a premium subscriber with
lynda.com, you'll have access to the
| | 00:03 | exercise files, and the exercise files
allow you to follow along with me step by step.
| | 00:08 | So if you plan on using them, I highly
recommend placing them in a convenient
| | 00:13 | location such as the desktop.
| | 00:15 | When you double click the exercise
files folder, you'll see the files we'll be
| | 00:19 | using in some of the movies and
some of the chapters of this title.
| | 00:23 | Now if you don't have access to
the exercise files, not to worry.
| | 00:27 | You can try following along with your
own files or you can also learn lots by
| | 00:31 | simply sitting back, relaxing, and watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Upgrading and MigratingAssessing your hardware and Windows 8 versions| 00:00 | Before we dive right into Windows 8,
we should discuss what you'll need in
| | 00:03 | the way of hardware as well as the different
editions of Windows 8 you can choose from.
| | 00:08 | Firstly, you should know that Windows 8
will work just fine on the same hardware
| | 00:13 | that powers Windows 7.
| | 00:15 | Now ideally, your processor is going
to be at least one gigahertz or faster.
| | 00:20 | You'll need a gigabyte of RAM for a
32-bit installation and 2 gigs of RAM
| | 00:24 | available for 64-bit installation.
| | 00:27 | Your hard drive, you're going to need some
free space, 16 gigs for a 32-bit install.
| | 00:32 | You'll need 20 gigabytes of free
space for your 64-bit installation.
| | 00:35 | An ideal graphics card might be a Microsoft
DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM driver.
| | 00:43 | And there are some additional
requirements if you're going to use certain
| | 00:46 | features, like touch for example.
| | 00:48 | Of course you're going to need a tablet
or a monitor that supports multi-touch.
| | 00:51 | If you're going to be accessing the Windows
store and downloading and running apps,
| | 00:56 | you're going to need an active internet
connection and a screen resolution
| | 01:00 | of at least 1024 x 768.
| | 01:03 | It's going to need to be even higher
if you want to use cool features like
| | 01:06 | snapping windows to the side of your screen.
| | 01:09 | In that case, you're going to need to bump
your resolution up to at least 1366 x 768.
| | 01:16 | Now Windows 8 has been re-imagined and this
also applies to the editions you can choose from.
| | 01:21 | Microsoft has made it a lot easier for
customers to know exactly what edition
| | 01:25 | will best suit their needs, when they
either upgrade their current computers
| | 01:29 | or purchase new ones.
| | 01:31 | We'll begin with Windows 8, which will be the
right choice for most consumers or home users.
| | 01:37 | It's going to work on your standard,
x86/64 computers and tablets whether you're
| | 01:43 | using a touch screen, keyboard
and mouse or all of the above.
| | 01:47 | Those who go with Windows 8 edition
will experience a newly updated Windows
| | 01:51 | Explorer and Task Manager, and
better support for multiple monitors.
| | 01:56 | You'll even have the ability to
switch languages on the fly and that's
| | 02:01 | something that was only available in
the Ultimate and Enterprise editions of
| | 02:05 | previous Windows versions.
| | 02:07 | Windows 8 Pro is ideal for tech
enthusiasts and business technical professionals
| | 02:13 | who need a broader set
of Windows 8 technologies.
| | 02:16 | It includes all of the features in
Windows 8 plus features for encryption,
| | 02:20 | virtualization, PC management,
and domain connectivity.
| | 02:25 | Also the Windows Media Center is available as
an economical media pack add-on to Windows 8 Pro.
| | 02:31 | So if you're an enthusiast or you want
to use your PC in a business environment,
| | 02:36 | you'll probably want Windows 8 Pro.
| | 02:39 | Windows RT is the newest member of the
Windows family, also known as Windows on ARM or WOA.
| | 02:47 | This single edition is only
available pre-installed on PCs and tablets
| | 02:51 | powered by ARM processors.
| | 02:53 | Windows RT won't run
traditional x86/64 desktop software.
| | 02:58 | Instead, it will run touch-oriented
apps based on Windows Runtime, Microsoft's
| | 03:03 | programming model for mobile apps.
| | 03:06 | Windows RT also includes touch-optimized
desktop versions of the new Microsoft
| | 03:10 | Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and OneNote programs.
| | 03:15 | Lastly, as with previous versions of
Windows, there is an edition of Windows 8
| | 03:20 | specifically for those enterprise
customers with software assurance agreements.
| | 03:25 | Windows 8 Enterprise includes all the
features of Windows 8 Pro plus features
| | 03:30 | for IT organizations that enable PC
management and deployment, advanced
| | 03:35 | security, virtualization, new
mobility scenarios and a whole lot more.
| | 03:41 | This is the version of Windows 8
I'm going to be using in this title.
| | 03:45 | So those are your Windows 8 choices and
it's good to know they all run well on
| | 03:49 | your existing Windows 7 hardware
without the need for any major upgrades.
| | 03:54 | For you, XP users upgrading to Windows 8,
review the system requirements at the
| | 03:58 | beginning of this movie to
make sure you're ready to roll.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Upgrading from other Windows versions| 00:00 | If you haven't already installed
Windows 8 or purchased a new PC with Windows 8
| | 00:05 | already installed, this next movie is for you.
| | 00:08 | Microsoft offers some upgrade
options you should know about.
| | 00:10 | So, let's explore upgrading to Windows 8 now.
| | 00:14 | We'll begin with pricing.
| | 00:16 | Of course pricing can change at any time,
but at the time of this recording,
| | 00:20 | the cost to move to Windows 8 from
previous versions of Windows is quite
| | 00:23 | attractive, in my opinion.
| | 00:26 | You don't have to pay for Windows 8 at
all if you decide to buy a computer or
| | 00:31 | device with Windows 8 already
installed. It's kind of free.
| | 00:34 | Although I'm sure you can consider the
price for the hardware, does include a
| | 00:38 | nominal fee for Windows 8.
| | 00:40 | If you already have your computer
and it's running a previous version of
| | 00:44 | Windows, you can upgrade online
to Windows 8 for a mere $39.99.
| | 00:49 | If you want the DVD though, you can
buy the upgrade in store for $69.99.
| | 00:55 | It's even better if you buy or bought
an eligible Windows 7 PC between June 2,
| | 01:00 | 2012 and January 31, 2013, because
you'll be able to upgrade to Windows 8 Pro
| | 01:07 | for only $14.99 in that scenario.
| | 01:10 | You'll just need to register for the
upgrade offer before the end of February
| | 01:14 | 2013 to get this pricing.
| | 01:15 | Now Microsoft also has some special pricing
for upgrading from Windows 8 to Windows 8 Pro.
| | 01:22 | So that's a quick overview of the
pricing, but it's also important to consider
| | 01:26 | what will happen to your current
configuration when you decide to upgrade to
| | 01:30 | Windows 8 from your current
Windows installation. Let's take a look.
| | 01:35 | First of all, if you installed the
Windows 8 Release Preview and you've been
| | 01:39 | working with Windows 8 for a while now,
what you get to keep when you upgrade to
| | 01:43 | the full blown version of
Windows 8 is pretty much nothing.
| | 01:47 | Your files will be saved in a folder
called Windows.old, and it's the exact same
| | 01:53 | thing if you already have
Windows 8 Developer Preview installed.
| | 01:57 | When you go to upgrade, look for the
Windows.old folder for your old files.
| | 02:01 | Now if you're upgrading from
Windows 7, it's a little bit different.
| | 02:04 | You can keep your programs, your
windows settings, user accounts and your files
| | 02:08 | just the way they're setup.
| | 02:10 | When you're upgrading from Windows Vista,
you get to keep your windows settings,
| | 02:14 | user accounts and files.
| | 02:17 | If you're going to be upgrading from
Windows XP, you get to keep your user
| | 02:20 | accounts and your files.
| | 02:23 | So that's a quick overview or a quick
look at what you're in for if you haven't
| | 02:27 | already upgraded to Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Transferring old files to Windows 8| 00:00 | In the previous movie, we learned how
you can keep your user accounts, programs,
| | 00:05 | windows settings, even your files
when upgrading from certain versions of
| | 00:09 | Windows to Windows 8,
that's on the same computer.
| | 00:12 | But what if you want to move files from
one computer, maybe running a previous
| | 00:15 | version of Windows, to a new
computer running Windows 8?
| | 00:19 | There's a tool called Windows Easy
Transfer we're going to look at
| | 00:23 | to help you do that right now.
| | 00:24 | Now of course I'm in Windows 8.
| | 00:26 | If you're in a Windows 7 computer, you
can find Easy Transfer by going to your
| | 00:31 | Start button in the bottom left-
hand corner and searching for it.
| | 00:34 | Here in Windows 8, I go to the bottom right-
hand corner where I'll find my Search term.
| | 00:39 | From here, I'm going to type in Windows
Easy, and you can see already over here
| | 00:44 | under Apps, there's Windows
Easy Transfer right there.
| | 00:48 | So, however you access it, go
ahead and run it and this is kind of a
| | 00:51 | wizard-based application that's
going to help you transfer files from one
| | 00:56 | computer to another, and there's a
number of different options involved.
| | 00:59 | So, let's go through them.
| | 01:00 | First of all, you can see from the
Welcome screen here, we can transfer user
| | 01:04 | accounts, e-mail, documents, all your
internet favorites, for example, videos,
| | 01:09 | music, pictures and a whole lot more.
| | 01:11 | So let's move on to the next
step by clicking the Next button.
| | 01:15 | So, how do we want to
transfer these items to our new PC?
| | 01:19 | There is something called an Easy
Transfer Cable, and if you have one, you'll
| | 01:23 | have it plugged in to one computer and
plugged in to another computer that will
| | 01:27 | be the destination for your files.
| | 01:30 | You could also use a network if you wanted to.
| | 01:32 | So if you are connected to a network,
use a network drive and a folder location,
| | 01:37 | or here's a popular one, use an
external hard drive or a USB Flash drive,
| | 01:42 | and that's what I'm going to select.
| | 01:44 | I have it already plugged in to my computer.
| | 01:46 | So when we select that, we now have to
choose what stage of the transfer we're in.
| | 01:51 | Are we going to be grabbing
our files to be transferred?
| | 01:54 | In other words, this is my old PC, my
current PC where I want to grab the files
| | 01:59 | and settings from, or am I at stage 2
where I want to actually take those files
| | 02:04 | that I've already transferred
and put them into my new computer.
| | 02:08 | So let's go to the very first
step which is, "This is my old PC."
| | 02:12 | This would be your Windows 7 PC for example.
| | 02:14 | So it's going to run a check.
| | 02:15 | It's going to see what can be transferred.
| | 02:18 | You'll see your current user
account. You can see mine.
| | 02:20 | I've set up a dummy Hotmail account
here, and it's scanning my drives in my
| | 02:24 | different locations.
| | 02:26 | It's also going to look at my shared
items, see what it can find there that
| | 02:30 | can be transferred.
| | 02:31 | In the end, I'll get to pick and choose
if I want everything or parts of that.
| | 02:35 | So, let's give it a second to
scan and we'll continue from there.
| | 02:39 | So depending on the size of your drives
and the number of files and settings you
| | 02:44 | have that could take a few minutes
or it could take many, many minutes.
| | 02:47 | Also it depends on the speed of your
computer as well, but eventually you'll
| | 02:51 | arrive at this screen where it will
display first of all at the very top, a
| | 02:54 | check mark next to your user account
and you'll see the size of the files
| | 02:59 | that have been selected.
| | 03:01 | Now, these are files that are
transferrable and we can customize that by
| | 03:04 | clicking the Customize link.
| | 03:06 | Over here, you'll see check marks by
default next to everything, your documents,
| | 03:10 | your music, pictures, videos,
your settings and other items.
| | 03:15 | If you want to make changes to any of
that, you can click Advanced or just
| | 03:18 | simply deselect the ones you don't want.
| | 03:21 | By clicking Advanced, you get right
into the folders and you'll see them all
| | 03:24 | checked off here where you
can go in and deselect anything.
| | 03:27 | For example, saved games, I
don't care about keeping all of that.
| | 03:31 | I'll save that change and it brings me
back and my number may have changed slightly.
| | 03:36 | Same goes for any shared items.
| | 03:38 | If there are shared items you don't
care about, you can click Customize to
| | 03:41 | change those as well.
| | 03:42 | You'll end up with a
total size to be transferred.
| | 03:45 | Clicking Next will prompt you for a
password and this is a password you're going
| | 03:49 | to make up and it's a password you're
going to use at the other end to release
| | 03:53 | those files to your new computer.
| | 03:55 | So we just type that in.
| | 03:57 | Use your tab key if you like and type
in the exact same password because you
| | 04:00 | can't see what you're typing.
| | 04:02 | It's just the confirmation,
and then you can click Save.
| | 04:06 | When you do that, you'll see an
option now to select that device you want
| | 04:10 | to copy your files to.
| | 04:12 | So you can see I have my Removable Disk over
here with plenty of room on it. I select that.
| | 04:20 | I click Open, and now I can just
create a folder if I wanted to or click Save
| | 04:26 | and everything goes in there.
| | 04:28 | I'm going to create a new folder.
| | 04:29 | I'm going to call it Easy Transfer.
| | 04:34 | I'll press Enter, open that and save.
| | 04:38 | When I click Save, you can see what's happening.
| | 04:42 | The files and the settings are
being saved to that location.
| | 04:45 | Now, when it's time for me to move all
of that to my new computer, I'll move to
| | 04:50 | the new Windows 8 computer, I'll run
Windows Easy Transfer, but I'll take the
| | 04:55 | other selection which would be
"This is my new computer" and just bring
| | 05:00 | everything into it by following the prompts just
like we did to get our files to be transferred.
| | 05:06 | So that's Windows Easy Transfer,
something you'll want to consider using
| | 05:10 | if you need to move files from one computer
to another computer running Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. The Windows 8 User InterfaceGetting familiar with the new user interface| 00:00 | I would guess the biggest challenge for
anyone who is new to Windows 8 will be
| | 00:04 | navigating the new user interface.
| | 00:06 | When you boot your Windows 8 machine,
you're now presented with this
| | 00:09 | Windows Start screen, which is very different
from any previous version of Microsoft Windows.
| | 00:15 | Now Windows 8 has been designed in
what they call the new Metro apps style
| | 00:20 | intended for touchscreens and mobile devices.
| | 00:22 | Meaning, you'll see and use similar
navigation techniques on a tablet,
| | 00:27 | your Windows phone and even on your
computer with the touch screen attached.
| | 00:32 | Now, we'll explore touch
a little later on its own.
| | 00:34 | For now, let's explore this new UI
using our mouse and keyboard which is really
| | 00:38 | what most people will be doing on their PCs.
| | 00:42 | First, we'll talk about what you
see on the Start screen, these tiles.
| | 00:45 | The tiles represent mostly Metro-
style apps that come with Windows 8.
| | 00:51 | All you have to do is click
them once to activate them.
| | 00:54 | Let's say, for example, we
want to bring up the calendar.
| | 00:57 | Click once on the Calendar tile and
you launch the calendar just like that.
| | 01:01 | Now probably the most important thing
to notice about these Metro apps is you
| | 01:05 | don't have a menu bar.
| | 01:07 | There's no title bar.
| | 01:08 | You don't see minimize and
maximize buttons. That's all gone.
| | 01:12 | So you actually leave this running, if
you want to go back, for example, to the
| | 01:16 | Windows start screen, and the most
important key on your keyboard is going to
| | 01:20 | be the Windows key.
| | 01:22 | Just give it a tap.
| | 01:23 | You see it takes you right
back to the start screen.
| | 01:25 | Now we didn't really close up the Calendar so
just keep in mind, it's running in the background.
| | 01:30 | If we want to go back to it, we
can click the Calendar icon or we can
| | 01:34 | run something else.
| | 01:35 | Let's go down to the Weather tile and click it.
| | 01:37 | So now we have a second app that's running.
| | 01:41 | So we'll leave this on our screen and
what we'll do is explore something that's
| | 01:45 | new to the Windows 8 UI and that is hot corners.
| | 01:49 | You can access all kinds of different
features by moving your mouse to one of
| | 01:53 | the four corners on your screen.
| | 01:55 | Let's start with the top right-hand corner.
| | 01:57 | You'll see these charms appear down the
right-hand side for searching, sharing.
| | 02:02 | There's access to the Start screen as well.
| | 02:04 | So if you don't like using your
Windows key on the keyboard, you could click
| | 02:08 | Start right from here, access
Devices and Settings from here as well.
| | 02:11 | Move your mouse back to
the center, it disappears.
| | 02:14 | Let's try the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 02:16 | Same thing, we're going to see our charms
appear on the right-hand side of our screen.
| | 02:21 | Now let's go to the top left-hand
corner where you're going to see a thumbnail
| | 02:25 | of any of the apps that might
be running like our Calendar.
| | 02:28 | So clicking the calendar
actually switches us over to it.
| | 02:31 | Now we still have our hot corners
like we did when we were looking at the
| | 02:35 | other app, our weather app.
| | 02:37 | Let's go down to the bottom left-hand
corner and you'll see the Start tile up here.
| | 02:41 | This is another way to get
quickly back to the Start screen.
| | 02:44 | So let's click it, and
we're back to the start screen.
| | 02:46 | Right clicking is something else that
will come in handy here in Windows 8.
| | 02:50 | Right clicking your mouse, depending
where you are, is going to give you access
| | 02:53 | to additional features.
| | 02:55 | So here from the Start screen, for
example, if you right click off to the side
| | 02:59 | not on a tile itself, you're going to
see the app bar appear at the bottom, and
| | 03:04 | there's only one option right now
that appears here. It's All Apps.
| | 03:07 | Give it a click and you can see it
changes from the traditional Start screen
| | 03:10 | with our tiles to display many, many
more icons representing some of the apps
| | 03:16 | that we saw as tiles as well as many
other apps and accessories over here on
| | 03:20 | the right-hand side.
| | 03:21 | In fact, there may be so many you
need to scroll over to see them all.
| | 03:25 | Now we can press the Windows key on the
keyboard to go back to the traditional
| | 03:29 | view of our tiles if you like.
| | 03:31 | There's a lot we can do to customize.
| | 03:33 | We'll talk about that later.
| | 03:35 | But one thing you may have noticed
is that we simply move from one app to
| | 03:38 | another by launching them and
switching to them, which means we could have
| | 03:42 | several apps running in the background.
| | 03:44 | How do we close them up?
| | 03:46 | Well, there are a couple of different options.
| | 03:48 | Here from our Start screen, if we go to
the top left-hand corner, the hot corner
| | 03:52 | we know, we're going to see
any apps that might be running.
| | 03:55 | Now, just slide down and you'll
see all of the apps that are running,
| | 03:58 | represented by thumbnails.
| | 04:00 | So if we want to close up Weather, for
example, we could right click it here.
| | 04:04 | The only option is Close.
| | 04:06 | When we click Close, we've
actually closed up that app.
| | 04:09 | Let's just click the Calendar icon.
| | 04:11 | We won't right click. To switch to it,
| | 04:13 | another option is to move to the very
top, and when you see the hand appear,
| | 04:17 | click and drag it down.
| | 04:18 | So we go up to the top.
| | 04:20 | There's the hand and then we click and
drag it down, turns into a smaller screen
| | 04:25 | as you move to the bottom.
| | 04:26 | It kind of fades out and let
go and you've just closed it up.
| | 04:31 | Now one tile that looks like another
Metro app is actually your old fashioned
| | 04:36 | desktop, and you can see
it here labeled as Desktop.
| | 04:39 | It'll get you access to the similar
UI that you've already been using in
| | 04:43 | s
previous versions of Windows.
| | 04:46 | Non-Metro apps will automatically launch
the desktop to run in this environment,
| | 04:50 | but you can go there
anytime by clicking this tile.
| | 04:52 | We will explore the desktop
in detail in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the old Windows 7 desktop| 00:00 | One of the tiles on your Windows 8
Start screen is labeled Desktop.
| | 00:04 | Now because not all apps and programs
of the new Metro-style in Windows 8,
| | 00:09 | we'll automatically be taken to the
old- styled desktop you're accustomed to
| | 00:13 | in previous versions of Windows to run
those older programs that still exist.
| | 00:17 | Now we can also get there
anytime by clicking the tile itself.
| | 00:20 | So let's go ahead and click the desktop
tile, which takes us directly to that
| | 00:24 | older environment where you'll see
icons for example, shortcut icons.
| | 00:29 | If you have the Exercise Files and you put
them on the desktop like me, that's where
| | 00:32 | you can get to them.
| | 00:34 | You also have your desktop background,
and as you move down to the bottom of
| | 00:37 | your screen, you'll see the old task bar pop up.
| | 00:41 | Now, the same tricks for getting
back to the Start screen work here.
| | 00:44 | I like to use the Windows key on the
keyboard a nice little shortcut.
| | 00:49 | As we move back to our Windows Start
screen here in Windows 8, the desktop is
| | 00:54 | now running in the background like
any other app that we may have started.
| | 00:58 | So if we go up to the top left-hand
corner for example, there it is, there's the
| | 01:01 | icon for our desktop.
| | 01:03 | We can click it there to go back.
| | 01:05 | Let's go back to our Windows 8 Start
screen by pressing the Windows key.
| | 01:10 | The fastest way back to the desktop
is to just press that key again.
| | 01:14 | Go ahead and do that.
| | 01:15 | Notice, it's a quick way to flip back
and forth between the two environments.
| | 01:19 | Let's go back to our
Windows 8 Start screen here.
| | 01:21 | When we try to run a program that is
not programmed in the new Metro app style,
| | 01:26 | we'll automatically be taken to the
Desktop as well. So let's try that.
| | 01:30 | We'll go to the bottom right-hand corner
this time, and as we move our mouse there,
| | 01:34 | the charms show up on the right-hand side.
| | 01:36 | We'll go up to Search and say, we
want to run the old WordPad that
| | 01:40 | we're accustomed to.
| | 01:41 | Clicking Search allows us to type in WordPad.
| | 01:44 | Actually, all you need to do is start to
type in the word "Word" and there it is
| | 01:48 | over there on the left, WordPad.
| | 01:50 | So we'll give it a click and notice it
takes us to our old desktop environment
| | 01:55 | before launching WordPad.
| | 01:57 | It's not a Metro app designed for
Windows 8 but we can still use it here in our
| | 02:02 | old desktop environment.
| | 02:04 | Now we will be working with
WordPad a little bit later on.
| | 02:07 | So let's just close it up for now by
going to the top right-hand corner and
| | 02:11 | clicking the Close button.
| | 02:12 | Here we are in our old desktop environment
where we have certain features and
| | 02:17 | functions that are accessible to us from here.
| | 02:20 | For example, when we move to the bottom
of the screen and we see the old taskbar,
| | 02:23 | we can access Internet Explorer,
Windows Explorer or we could
| | 02:28 | right click to bring up the pop up menu that
gives us access to other toolbars, for
| | 02:33 | example, Task Manager.
| | 02:34 | Our decision whether we want to lock
the taskbar in its current location or not
| | 02:38 | and access the taskbar properties as well.
| | 02:41 | Maybe you don't like the auto-hide, so you
could turn that off if you wanted to from here.
| | 02:46 | Just click Cancel.
| | 02:47 | We can also right click anywhere on the
desktop itself to access some of those shortcuts.
| | 02:52 | For example, the way
we're going to view our icons.
| | 02:56 | As we move a little further down, we can a
djust screen resolution directly from here,
| | 02:59 | and we can personalize
our desktop environment as well.
| | 03:04 | We'll just click anywhere on the
desktop to close up that pop up menu.
| | 03:06 | Now, the only thing missing here on the
desktop environment for me is that old
| | 03:11 | Start button or what we used to call
the Windows Orb in the bottom left-hand
| | 03:15 | corner of your screen.
| | 03:16 | You now get what we call the Windows
Start thumbnail as we move down to the
| | 03:20 | bottom left, you'll see it there.
| | 03:22 | We can't just click Start here to
start running WordPad for example.
| | 03:26 | This will actually just take us
directly back to our Windows 8 Start screen.
| | 03:31 | So it's one way to get back.
| | 03:32 | But here's a little secret, right
click this thumbnail and look at all the
| | 03:37 | shortcuts you'll find on
the pop up menu that appears.
| | 03:40 | Now we're going to get into many of
these features and functions as we move
| | 03:44 | through the various movies
and chapters in this title.
| | 03:46 | So let's just click anywhere off in the
desktop and press the Windows key on the
| | 03:51 | keyboard to return to our new UI.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using touch screens and gestures| 00:00 | If you're running Windows 8 on a computer
with a touchscreen attached or if
| | 00:05 | you're going to be running it on a
tablet or smartphone, you'll want to know
| | 00:08 | how to navigate using touch
or what we call Gestures.
| | 00:12 | Let's explore some of them now.
| | 00:14 | We'll begin with launching an app,
simply tap the app you want to launch,
| | 00:19 | like the calendar for example, and there it is.
| | 00:22 | To access the charms where we find the
Start button, swipe from the far right
| | 00:26 | edge to the left and the charms appear.
| | 00:30 | Let's tap the Start button and we're back.
| | 00:33 | Let's tap another app, Internet
Explorer, to get it running, too.
| | 00:36 | To access the switcher, swipe
from the far left edge to the right.
| | 00:43 | Tap the Calendar app to switch to it.
| | 00:46 | To close an open up, you can swipe
from the very top edge down until the app
| | 00:50 | turns into a thumbnail.
| | 00:52 | Continue dragging it down to the
bottom of the screen now where it will
| | 00:56 | eventually disappear,
| | 00:57 | meaning, it has been closed.
| | 00:59 | As you know, you can do this
with your mouse pointer as well.
| | 01:02 | We know right clicking inside an app
or on the Start screen will bring up
| | 01:07 | the app bar, to do this on a touchscreen,
swipe from the very bottom edge of
| | 01:12 | the screen and move up.
| | 01:14 | Now here in the Start screen, we see the "All
apps" option in the bottom right. So let's tap it.
| | 01:20 | Now, with too many apps to view in one
screen, we can swipe right-to-left and
| | 01:25 | left-to-right to see them.
| | 01:27 | We can also zoom out by pinching
which is the same as clicking the minimize
| | 01:32 | button with your mouse in the
bottom right corner of the screen.
| | 01:35 | Now, tap anywhere in an empty spot
on the Start screen to zoom back out.
| | 01:40 | Working with a tablet will usually mean
no physical keyboard but when you access
| | 01:45 | an area that requires input,
your soft keyboard will appear.
| | 01:48 | Let's try it, swipe from the far
right edge to access the charms.
| | 01:53 | Let's tap Search now and
notice the soft keyboard appears.
| | 01:58 | We'll type in Calendar, then tap the Calendar
thumbnail in the search results on the left.
| | 02:05 | So there you have it.
| | 02:06 | Microsoft has made it quite easy to
navigate Windows 8, whether you're using
| | 02:10 | a mouse and keyboard or Gestures on
a touchscreen tablet or mobile device
| | 02:15 | like your Windows phone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Switching between running apps with Switcher| 00:00 | In our earlier tour of the Windows UI
and Start screen, we touched on viewing
| | 00:05 | apps that are running,
switching between them, and closing them.
| | 00:08 | Now much of this was done using
something called the Switcher.
| | 00:12 | There's more that we can do with
the switcher, so let's explore it in a
| | 00:15 | little more depth now.
| | 00:17 | First, we'll need some running app.
| | 00:19 | So let's go to our tiles here.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to open up Weather.
| | 00:24 | Now I'm going to return back to my
Start screen by using the keyboard shortcut
| | 00:28 | which is the Windows key. Give it a tap.
| | 00:30 | Let's run the Calendar.
| | 00:31 | That opens up the Calendar again in
full screen, just like our Weather.
| | 00:35 | We'll go back to the start screen hitting
the Windows key and open up our desktop.
| | 00:40 | Now here on the desktop, if we
wanted to, we could have multiple apps
| | 00:44 | running here as well.
| | 00:45 | But we're going to go back to our
start screen hitting the Windows key,
| | 00:49 | and let's say we want to access any one
of the running apps that are running in
| | 00:54 | the background now.
| | 00:55 | To access the switcher, we can move
our mouse to the top or bottom left-hand
| | 00:59 | corners of the screen.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to go to the top left and then
just guide my mouse down towards the center.
| | 01:06 | If you go down to the bottom left-
hand corner, you just start to guide your
| | 01:10 | mouse up and you'll see the thumbnails
representing each of the apps running in the background.
| | 01:16 | Now notice that there is only one
thumbnail for the desktop, and if you wanted
| | 01:22 | to see all of the apps that are
running on the desktop, you can't see them
| | 01:26 | from the switcher here.
| | 01:27 | You actually have to use the old
fashioned Alt+Tab keyboard shortcut to see all
| | 01:31 | those apps and run through them as well.
| | 01:33 | Now, using the keyboard shortcut to
access a switcher which is the Windows key
| | 01:37 | and the tab key, you can continue to
hold down the Windows key while tapping the
| | 01:42 | tab key to cycle through the open
apps here on the switcher, and then just
| | 01:46 | simply release on the app you want to switch to.
| | 01:48 | But with the mouse, we just
click the one we want to go to.
| | 01:51 | Let's click Calendar. All right.
| | 01:52 | Now, what if we want to track the
weather while we use our calendar?
| | 01:57 | In Windows 8, we can have two apps
running side-by-side using a snap feature.
| | 02:02 | Just keep in mind it'll only
work with a high enough resolution.
| | 02:06 | I'm using the minimum, 1366 x
768, and it's the width of 1366
| | 02:12 | that is the most important number here.
| | 02:15 | So let's go back to our desktop.
| | 02:18 | We can move into one of the hot corners in
the top left or right and click the desktop.
| | 02:23 | Anywhere on the desktop, right click,
go down to Screen Resolution and click
| | 02:28 | there and you'll see your current setting.
| | 02:30 | You can see mine is the minimum, 1366 x
768, and if you need to, you can switch
| | 02:36 | to a higher resolution from here.
| | 02:39 | I'm just going to click
outside and click Cancel.
| | 02:41 | I know that my resolution is high
enough for the snap feature to work.
| | 02:46 | So we'll go back now to our calendar.
| | 02:49 | Let's go up to the top left corner,
and as we move down, we see our switcher.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to click Calendar and I'm back.
| | 02:56 | All right, so one way to use a snap
feature is from the top left corner.
| | 03:00 | Let's say I did want to monitor the
weather, while I work on my calendar.
| | 03:04 | I'll go back to the switcher, and if we
want the weather to show up here on our
| | 03:09 | screen, we can click and drag it.
| | 03:11 | As we move towards the right, you can see
a little space opens up on the left for it.
| | 03:15 | When we release, it takes up
that space down the left-hand side.
| | 03:19 | Notice also that on the border, there
are these three little dots indicating,
| | 03:24 | this is an adjustable border.
| | 03:26 | If I wanted the majority of my screen
taken up by the weather while monitoring
| | 03:30 | my calendar, I can click and drag that over.
| | 03:32 | As I get past halfway, I can
release and you can see what happens.
| | 03:37 | The weather takes up the
bigger part of the screen.
| | 03:39 | My calendar over on the left, and
of course, I can do the opposite.
| | 03:43 | Just drag it back, and now I have my
two apps running side-by-side, snapped
| | 03:46 | to fill the screen.
| | 03:47 | Remember, you need a high enough
resolution for any of this to work.
| | 03:52 | Now, we can also use a keyboard
shortcut to move between our active apps.
| | 03:56 | Let's try the Windows key and the period.
| | 03:59 | Hold down your Windows key, and each time you
tap the period, you can see what's happening.
| | 04:04 | There's the switch that we
did manually, a moment ago.
| | 04:06 | Hold down Windows and tap the period again.
| | 04:09 | You can see now our main screen,
the Weather, takes up the full screen.
| | 04:14 | Try it again, and now it's over to the right.
| | 04:17 | We can go back to our switcher at any
time to select something to run in that
| | 04:21 | larger area like our Calendar for example.
| | 04:24 | Now at any time, we can maximize
also by just moving that border.
| | 04:28 | Let's click and drag the border for
our Calendar on the right, all the way to
| | 04:32 | the right and release.
| | 04:33 | You can see it's now taking up our full screen.
| | 04:36 | Now, on a touch device like a tablet
or smartphones switching between running
| | 04:40 | apps is similar, but a little more difficult.
| | 04:44 | To access the switcher, you would
swipe from the left edge of the screen,
| | 04:48 | and when the previous app thumbnail appears,
swipe over ever so slightly to the left
| | 04:53 | again, and if you do it just
right, the switcher appears.
| | 04:57 | Now, you just tap the app
that you want to access.
| | 05:00 | So that's how the switcher works.
| | 05:02 | Let's close up our running apps using the
switcher before we continue onto the next movie.
| | 05:07 | You can go up to the top left corner,
move down, and when the switcher opens up,
| | 05:12 | one option, let's say the Weather we
want to close up, we just click and drag it
| | 05:16 | down all the way towards the
bottom of your screen and release.
| | 05:19 | You've just closed it.
| | 05:20 | So if we go back to our switcher now and
take a look, you can see the only other
| | 05:25 | thing running is the desktop.
| | 05:26 | Another option is to
right click and choose Close.
| | 05:28 | Notice the Snap options
that appear there as well.
| | 05:31 | We'll close it up and we're going to
close up our Calendar as well here.
| | 05:36 | So let's go to the top of
the Calendar screen now.
| | 05:39 | When we see the hand, we'll click and
drag it down to the very bottom and we're
| | 05:43 | back to our Start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Personalizing Windows 8| 00:00 | Just as with other previous versions of
Microsoft Windows, you have the ability
| | 00:04 | here in Windows 8 to totally
customize and personalize what you see.
| | 00:09 | We're going to begin with our Start screen
and the tiles that appear here by default.
| | 00:14 | So yours may not look exactly like mine.
| | 00:16 | I have the default background.
| | 00:18 | The tiles that I see here are my default tiles,
the default location and the default size.
| | 00:24 | Notice some of them are large,
some of them are a little bit smaller.
| | 00:27 | Well, these are settings that can be changed.
| | 00:30 | First of all, let's say we
want to rearrange our tiles.
| | 00:32 | So the ones we use most often are
over here on the left-hand side.
| | 00:36 | Mail and Desktop definitely, I'm going
to use those very often but there are
| | 00:40 | others here that I might use more
often than Messaging and People.
| | 00:44 | For example, News, I'm going to click
and drag News over here to the left, and
| | 00:49 | you can see what happens.
| | 00:51 | Now, I have News, People and Messaging here.
| | 00:53 | Well the Desktop, it needs to be down there.
| | 00:55 | So I'm going to move it down.
| | 00:58 | Aside from People, maybe there's
something else I would rather see on the
| | 01:01 | left-hand side like my Calendar.
| | 01:03 | Drag it over here, and everything
gets rearranged. So far so good.
| | 01:07 | Now some of these don't need to be large tiles.
| | 01:09 | They take up too much room and there
might be other apps I'd like to add to
| | 01:12 | these list of tiles.
| | 01:14 | So I'm going to right click People.
| | 01:16 | When you right click a tile, you get
the app bar and you'll see some options.
| | 01:20 | For example, you can make it smaller
by clicking Smaller on a large tile, you
| | 01:25 | can see it takes up less space.
| | 01:27 | I'm going to do the same for Messaging.
| | 01:29 | Right click, make that one smaller,
and you can see how it rearranges
| | 01:33 | everything, giving me a little extra
space or real estate on my desktop where
| | 01:37 | I could add some new tiles.
| | 01:39 | Where would I go to get those?
| | 01:41 | Well, all you have to do is right click
anywhere in the background and the app
| | 01:45 | bar opens with the All Apps
option in the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:48 | We'll click that where we see all of
the apps that are available to us in
| | 01:52 | this new UI, including some Windows accessories
like Paint for example, one I use often.
| | 01:58 | So I'm going to right click Paint, and
you'll notice from the app bar here, one
| | 02:02 | of them is to pin it to the Start screen.
| | 02:05 | I can pin it down here on the
taskbar, so it's accessible from here.
| | 02:09 | But pin to Start means it will be a
tile that appears now on my start screen.
| | 02:13 | So when we hit the Windows key on the
keyboard, the shortcut to get back to our
| | 02:18 | desktop here or Windows Start screen,
notice we have a new tile called Paint.
| | 02:23 | We can move that into a more accessible
location by clicking and dragging it as well.
| | 02:28 | If there are some that you
never use, maybe I don't play games.
| | 02:31 | You can right click a tile and unpin it.
| | 02:35 | You can even uninstall programs or apps
from here but we don't want to do that.
| | 02:38 | We might need it down the road.
| | 02:40 | We just don't need it on
the Start screen right now.
| | 02:42 | So clicking Unpin from Start removes
that, again, creating some extra space.
| | 02:49 | Now as an administrator, you might use
administrator tools on a regular basis
| | 02:53 | and you want to add those to your start screen.
| | 02:55 | Well that's actually a
setting that we can change.
| | 02:58 | To access our settings, we can go
to the bottom right-hand corner or
| | 03:02 | top right-hand corner.
| | 03:04 | When the charms appear, the very
last one is your Settings charm.
| | 03:07 | Now, there is a keyboard shortcut,
Windows and the letter "I" to access
| | 03:12 | settings that we see here.
| | 03:13 | So you'll see something for
example, at the top for tiles.
| | 03:17 | Click Tiles, and notice that by default,
Admin tools are not being shown here.
| | 03:22 | If you use them and you do want them to
show, just click the slider and it moves
| | 03:26 | to the Yes position.
| | 03:28 | Now all we have to do is click here in
the background to close up our settings,
| | 03:32 | wait a moment, and the admin tools
show up over here on the right-hand side.
| | 03:36 | So if we go down to the bottom and use
the scroll bar that now appears, we can
| | 03:40 | see all of those admin tools, and just
like the other tiles, we can move them
| | 03:44 | around, position them into locations
where we want to be able to access them.
| | 03:49 | If you find that you don't use them,
you can turn them off the same way.
| | 03:52 | Let's use our keyboard shortcut this
time, windows and the letter "I" together
| | 03:56 | brings up our Settings.
| | 03:57 | We'll go back to Tiles and
we'll turn them back off.
| | 04:00 | Now when we click over here, it
takes a second and they disappear.
| | 04:06 | Let's go back to those settings all
for a minute, because there are some
| | 04:09 | personalization settings we
can change from there as well.
| | 04:12 | Windows key plus the
letter "I" brings it back up.
| | 04:15 | This time, we're going to go over here
to the right hand side and down to the
| | 04:19 | bottom to our Change PC Settings.
| | 04:22 | Click there and it opens
up the actual settings app.
| | 04:26 | Now, Personalize is selected at the
top on the left-hand side and we do have
| | 04:30 | three different categories, the Lock
Screen, Start screen, and Account Picture.
| | 04:35 | The Lock Screen is what we see when we
log out or perhaps when you first turn on
| | 04:40 | your computer and you're
prompted for a password.
| | 04:43 | So what do you want
showing up in the background?
| | 04:45 | You can choose your image.
| | 04:47 | If you have your own image, you can
use the Browse button to find that.
| | 04:50 | Also as we scroll down, you'll notice
there are certain apps that will continue
| | 04:54 | to run when the screen is locked.
| | 04:56 | So Messaging, Mail, and Calendar, but
click the Plus sign if there's something
| | 05:00 | you might want to add to that list.
| | 05:03 | When we go up to our Start screen,
we can change some of the personal
| | 05:06 | settings there as well.
| | 05:07 | You're going to see the current
selection in a preview here, and you can see
| | 05:12 | it's kind of a green on green and you
can see the design is selected from below.
| | 05:17 | So we can choose any design we like
but we can also change the color scheme.
| | 05:22 | So over here on the left, we have some
colors with the gray background, maybe
| | 05:27 | blue would be cool with the gray background.
| | 05:29 | We also have multicolor options as we
move over, for example, orange on orange.
| | 05:34 | Let me select that, you can see
what that's going to look like.
| | 05:38 | So click these little icons to see
what different options you have until you
| | 05:44 | find one that you like.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to go back to the default,
which is this greenish color on green
| | 05:51 | and that's my start screen.
| | 05:52 | Also, there's an Account picture that
can be displayed if you choose to browse
| | 05:57 | for an existing picture or actually
take a picture if your computer has a
| | 06:01 | built-in camera or a camera connected,
maybe it's a tablet, click the Camera
| | 06:06 | icon to take a current picture and
it will become your Account picture.
| | 06:10 | When we're done, we can just hit our
windows key to flip back to our Start
| | 06:14 | screen, and that's a quick look at
some of the things you can do with the
| | 06:18 | personalization settings.
| | 06:21 | Now something else that might be happening
for you that's not happening for me
| | 06:24 | is called Live Tile.
| | 06:27 | You might be seeing current
weather for your location.
| | 06:30 | You might be seeing Finance
updates or maybe news items.
| | 06:34 | That's called Live Tile
and I've turned them all off.
| | 06:36 | To turn them on or off, all you
have to do is right click the tile.
| | 06:40 | I'm going to go to my Calendar
and turn Live Tile on or off.
| | 06:44 | You'll notice it's a toggle.
| | 06:46 | So it can be turned on or off.
| | 06:49 | If you wanted to, try it with one of
the feeds like news or sports and you'll
| | 06:53 | see updates along the way.
| | 06:55 | Of course, this does use up some of
your computer resources, so be choosy about
| | 07:00 | what Live Tiles are turned on
and which ones are turned off.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. File ExplorerUsing the new Ribbon in the File Explorer| 00:00 | If you've been working with previous
versions of Microsoft Windows, one of
| | 00:03 | the utilities you have probably
worked with is the most popular utility of
| | 00:07 | all, Windows Explorer.
| | 00:09 | Here in Windows 8, Windows Explorer
has gone through a few changes and we're
| | 00:14 | going to start with the big one
which is a brand new ribbon interface.
| | 00:18 | So to launch Explorer from here at our
Start screen, we could go directly to the
| | 00:23 | desktop and load it up there.
| | 00:25 | It's not a Metro-style app, so that's
where it's going to run anyway or if you
| | 00:30 | have a tile here for Windows Explorer,
as I'm calling it right now, you could
| | 00:35 | access it or right click anywhere on the
desktop, select All apps where you will
| | 00:39 | find Windows Explorer retitled.
| | 00:43 | There it is, File Explorer.
| | 00:45 | Notice the icon has
remained the same, a yellow folder.
| | 00:48 | We can click it from here.
| | 00:49 | It's going to take us to our
desktop and launch the Explorer app.
| | 00:54 | Now if we move down to our taskbar here,
you'll see that it is running and it's
| | 00:58 | accessible here from the taskbar as well.
| | 01:00 | So we could have just switched over
to our desktop, click this icon and get
| | 01:04 | the exact same window.
| | 01:06 | Now what you're probably seeing by
default is a list of your library folders,
| | 01:10 | documents, music, et cetera,
showing up here with library selected.
| | 01:15 | We're going to take a look at some
changes that have happened to this UI
| | 01:18 | beginning in the top lefthand corner.
| | 01:20 | Here's what we call our Quick Access toolbar.
| | 01:23 | You will see an icon representing
Explorer that you can click to do things like
| | 01:26 | minimize, maximize, even close it up from here.
| | 01:29 | But then you're going to see some
actual tools, a Properties tool, a New Folder
| | 01:35 | button for creating new folders.
| | 01:37 | I have a Delete button here that
I've added and how did I do that?
| | 01:41 | By clicking the drop-down where you can
pick and choose what's going to show up
| | 01:44 | on your Quick Access toolbar.
| | 01:46 | Clicking one that's
already checked will remove it.
| | 01:49 | Go back there, click something
that's not checked and it appears on the
| | 01:54 | Quick Access toolbar. So it's up to you.
| | 01:56 | You can totally customize that.
| | 01:57 | That's not a big deal.
| | 01:59 | Over on the right hand side, we still
have our Minimize, Maximize, and our Close
| | 02:03 | button for closing up the program.
| | 02:05 | But what's really changed is right
below this bar and that is the Ribbons.
| | 02:10 | If yours is not expanded like mine, go
to the top right corner and just left of
| | 02:14 | the question mark Help icon, click the
expansion arrow that's currently pointing down.
| | 02:18 | So first you're going to see a file
menu tab as well as tabs representing the
| | 02:23 | different ribbons, the
Home ribbon, Share, and View.
| | 02:26 | Let's begin with the File tab.
| | 02:28 | We'll give it a click.
| | 02:30 | Now from here, you'll see file
commands like opening new windows.
| | 02:35 | Here we have one that allows us to
access the Command prompt, the old DOS
| | 02:38 | prompt that you may have been familiar with
in very early versions of Windows and before.
| | 02:45 | We can also go to a Delete history.
| | 02:47 | So if you've been deleting files,
here's where you go to and see what has been
| | 02:51 | deleted, but also here's
where we can go to get them back.
| | 02:55 | There is a Help function and
you'll see when we move to Help.
| | 02:58 | Anything with an arrow has more than one
option about Windows, there is the Help
| | 03:02 | feature, and there's the Close button
right down there at the bottom of our File
| | 03:06 | menu which will close up File Explorer.
| | 03:09 | Let's click the File tab again to close
that up and take a look at the Home tab.
| | 03:14 | Now the Home tab has a number of commands,
very common commands, copy, pasting,
| | 03:18 | deleting, et cetera.
| | 03:20 | Many of these are not accessible until
we actually have something selected such
| | 03:24 | as a file or a folder, so let's do that.
| | 03:26 | We'll go to the desktop and if you have
the Exercise Files like I do, we'll open
| | 03:31 | up that folder with a double click
where we'll see the contents listed here.
| | 03:35 | If you don't have the Exercise Files,
you can experiment with your own files.
| | 03:39 | Now these are different types of files.
| | 03:41 | We have JPEGs in here, we have a music
file, we have a video file, and it looks
| | 03:46 | like a PDF file here as well.
| | 03:48 | So let's just choose our PDF,
Volunteer Orientation Letter.
| | 03:52 | Now when we select the file, you can
see now we can copy, we can cut, we can
| | 03:58 | delete, we can move our copy
to other folders, et cetera.
| | 04:02 | Now that's PDF file.
| | 04:04 | Notice on the ribbon, we still have
our Home tab, Share, and View tabs.
| | 04:08 | If we go to Share, we have some
different sharing options like creating a zip
| | 04:13 | file or sharing with our
home group, specific people.
| | 04:17 | You can click the drop-down, if you will
have more options that will appear there.
| | 04:21 | We can stop sharing one that is shared, and
there are some security options from here as well.
| | 04:26 | But look what happens when we choose a
different type of file such as our Swatch.
| | 04:31 | Now that happens to be a
JPEG file or a picture file.
| | 04:34 | So look what happens to our
ribbon. A new tab appears.
| | 04:38 | It's context sensitive.
| | 04:39 | It's labeled picture tools and when we
click Manage, we're going to see options
| | 04:43 | for working with picture files like
rotating them, creating a slideshow, and
| | 04:47 | viewing our picture files in a
slideshow format or making that selected file
| | 04:51 | our background picture.
| | 04:53 | Now it doesn't make sense with the current view.
| | 04:55 | So let's go to our View tab and
change the way we're viewing our files.
| | 04:59 | You're probably seeing details like
me and in this case, we see the name of
| | 05:04 | our file, the date modified, the type of file
it is, the size, we can reorder these for example.
| | 05:10 | I want to go by the type of files
so they're all grouped together.
| | 05:13 | Here are my JPEGs then my
movie file then my MP3 and my PDF.
| | 05:18 | But we can also change the way
we view those files on the list.
| | 05:22 | Let's go to, for example, large icons.
| | 05:26 | As you hover over that, you get
an idea what's going to happen.
| | 05:29 | I like that view, so I'm
going to click it to lock it in.
| | 05:33 | And now maybe I do need to
rotate one of these images.
| | 05:36 | With Swatch selected, I
can go back to my Manage tab.
| | 05:39 | Maybe it needs to be rotated right or
left, and it will happen right there
| | 05:43 | in front of your eyes.
| | 05:45 | All right, let's go to a different type of file.
| | 05:47 | Let's go to our MP3 file, Easy For You.
| | 05:51 | When we click that, notice Music Tools
appear and when we click the Play tab
| | 05:56 | under Music Tools, we can actually play
this directly from File Explorer, here
| | 06:00 | then play all of our music files,
add it to a Playlist for example.
| | 06:04 | If we go to a different type of file
like a video file, we get Video Tools.
| | 06:09 | Again, it's a Play tab where we can
play that video directly from here.
| | 06:13 | So those are some major changes to
what we use to call Windows Explorer, now
| | 06:18 | Relabeled File Explorer.
| | 06:20 | All of the options for working with
your files appear on the various ribbons
| | 06:24 | including some new context sensitive
tools depending on the type of file you select.
| | 06:29 | We will leave this open as we
continue to work with File Explorer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing folders and files| 00:00 | Of course, the File Explorer here in
Windows 8 is all about staying organized,
| | 00:04 | allowing you to navigate through the
various folders and files on your computer
| | 00:08 | or any device connected to your computer.
| | 00:11 | But, you also have the ability to
create your own folders, move files around,
| | 00:16 | delete files and folders, things
we're going to talk about right now.
| | 00:20 | You'll notice here, I still have my
Exercise Files folder open here on the File
| | 00:25 | Explorer from the previous lesson.
| | 00:26 | If you need to get caught up, you can
go to the desktop and double click your
| | 00:30 | Exercise Files folder if
that's where you put it.
| | 00:33 | Otherwise, just go down to your
taskbar at the very bottom of your screen.
| | 00:36 | You'll find the File Explorer icon there,
give it a click and navigate to a
| | 00:40 | folder of your choice.
| | 00:42 | Right now, we're going to talk about what
you see down the left hand side of your screen.
| | 00:46 | It's called the Navigation Pane, and
you'll notice that it's kind of grouped
| | 00:50 | together with your Favorites at the top,
you'll see your Libraries, which are
| | 00:53 | made up of various folders, something
we'll talk about later on in this chapter.
| | 00:58 | Then you might see home groups if
you're connected, your computer, any hard
| | 01:03 | drives, any removable drives that
might be connected, you may also see some
| | 01:08 | network connections.
| | 01:09 | Every computer is going to be different,
so you may not see exactly what I have.
| | 01:14 | But the navigation techniques we're
going to use are going to be the same.
| | 01:17 | For example, if we want to go
to our desktop, we click Desktop.
| | 01:21 | We're going to be looking at
everything on our desktop over here on the
| | 01:24 | right hand side including access
to libraries, and your computer.
| | 01:29 | The only thing really that is on our
desktop, if we were to look at it is the
| | 01:34 | Recycle Bin and the Exercise Files.
| | 01:36 | The other options we see here are
just added for your convenience.
| | 01:40 | Let's say we want to go to the Downloads folder.
| | 01:43 | Clicking it here under Favorites is
going to show you all of the files
| | 01:46 | you've been downloading.
| | 01:47 | This is where they go to by default.
| | 01:49 | So you open up an email, there's an attachment.
| | 01:51 | It's downloaded to the Downloads folder.
| | 01:54 | Now if we want to go back, we can
obviously just click the folders, our
| | 01:58 | libraries, wherever we want to go,
or we can use the navigation buttons
| | 02:02 | that appear at the top.
| | 02:03 | If you don't remember the last folder
you were looking at, just click the Back
| | 02:07 | button and you'll see it's actually the Desktop.
| | 02:10 | Click it again and you'll
see it's our Exercise Files.
| | 02:13 | Now, if this is where we started,
there's nowhere to go back, but you'll notice
| | 02:17 | there is an arrow to take us up a level.
| | 02:19 | So Exercise Files is
actually part of the desktop.
| | 02:23 | Here across the top, you can see it's
also part of my User Account folder under
| | 02:27 | Users on my hard drive.
| | 02:29 | So I could navigate to it that way or I can
just use the up arrow to go up to the desktop.
| | 02:35 | You can see I also have the ability
to click each of these settings here,
| | 02:40 | each of these options,
| | 02:41 | by clicking, take me
directly to that location.
| | 02:44 | So I'm choosing my local disk, C drive,
you can see it's now highlighted over
| | 02:48 | here on the left and I can navigate
down through the various sub-folders to get
| | 02:52 | back to my Exercise Files.
| | 02:54 | That's the long way.
| | 02:56 | So probably, if it's a folder you're
going to use quite often, you might want to
| | 03:00 | make the Exercise Files a favorite, let's say.
| | 03:03 | So while viewing the contents of the
Exercise Files, go to Favorites and right-click.
| | 03:09 | Now, from here, you're going to see an
option that allows you to add the current
| | 03:12 | location to your favorites.
| | 03:14 | So clicking it at the bottom, you now
have quick access to your Exercise Files
| | 03:18 | no matter where you are.
| | 03:19 | So if I'm looking at my Music library,
and I want to go to the Exercise Files, I
| | 03:24 | can get there quickly right from there.
| | 03:26 | So that's just a couple of navigation tips.
| | 03:28 | Of course, when you scroll down
through your folders and sub-folders, you're
| | 03:32 | going to see these little arrows next to them
and we can expand or collapse, for example.
| | 03:37 | Clicking next to my name will
collapse that folder. It's under Users.
| | 03:41 | I can collapse that as well.
| | 03:43 | I can go all the way to collapsing the
local disc for me, my C drive, and of
| | 03:48 | course, clicking that same arrow will
also expand if you want to go browsing
| | 03:52 | through the various folders on your computer.
| | 03:55 | I'm going to collapse the C drive and
bring it right back where we started.
| | 04:01 | Now, to stay organized, you may want
to separate your files from one another.
| | 04:05 | We can go into our Documents
folder which is here under Libraries.
| | 04:09 | Clicking the expansion arrow shows
that that includes more than one folder.
| | 04:14 | Actually, it's My Documents
and Public Documents.
| | 04:17 | So if we want to go to the My Documents
folder, which for me is currently empty,
| | 04:21 | and I want to keep files
separate from one another.
| | 04:23 | I might consider creating new folders, and
there's a couple of different ways to do that.
| | 04:28 | If you right click My Documents, you're
going to see New on the pop up menu and Folder.
| | 04:33 | It's kind of the old way of doing it.
| | 04:34 | Now that we have the ribbon with My
Documents selected, you'll see
| | 04:39 | New folder right there.
| | 04:40 | You'll also see there's a keyboard shortcut,
Ctrl+Shift and the letter "N" as in new.
| | 04:46 | We also have that on the Quick
Access toolbar by default, New folder.
| | 04:51 | So clicking that, it's going to create
a new folder within the current folder
| | 04:54 | which means it's actually a sub-folder.
| | 04:57 | So say we want to keep our personal
files separate from our business files.
| | 05:00 | We could type in Personal.
| | 05:02 | When you press Enter on
your keyboard, it's locked in.
| | 05:06 | Let's say we want to create another one now.
| | 05:08 | Let's do it from our ribbon.
| | 05:09 | We'll click New folder and this, we'll
call it Business and hit Enter and we now
| | 05:16 | have two sub-folders under My Documents.
| | 05:18 | It also shows up here on the path.
| | 05:21 | Let's create one more and this time we'll
do a right-click anywhere inside this folder.
| | 05:26 | Go down to New, and from here, choose Folder.
| | 05:30 | This one, we'll call Trip2012 and press Return.
| | 05:35 | So now when we start working with files,
we could be in a program like Microsoft Word,
| | 05:39 | let's say, and we save the itinerary.
| | 05:42 | We can save it to any of these sub-folders
within the My Documents folder under
| | 05:47 | the Documents library. No problem.
| | 05:49 | Eventually though, you may no longer
need the files or the folders that you've
| | 05:53 | been storing and we can just simply
right-click any one of these folders to
| | 05:57 | delete it or as you can see, because
we have the new ribbon up here, with it
| | 06:01 | selected, let's select
Trip2012, that's come and gone.
| | 06:05 | We can go right up here to
the ribbon where we see Delete.
| | 06:08 | We also see the keyboard shortcut is
Ctrl+D. Notice that the Delete button also
| | 06:14 | has a drop down below.
| | 06:16 | So going down below shows you that you
can actually move it to the Recycle Bin,
| | 06:20 | and this is the default by the way,
clicking the Delete button, actually sends
| | 06:24 | it to the Recycle Bin, so does the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+D. But by clicking the
| | 06:29 | drop down, we can also permanently delete.
| | 06:31 | There is a keyboard shortcut for that as
well Shift+Delete, and it doesn't go to
| | 06:36 | the Recycle Bin where you can get it back.
| | 06:38 | It's permanently deleted.
| | 06:40 | We can also show confirmation
when we delete from the Recycle Bin.
| | 06:44 | So let's go to the Recycle Bin which is
the same as just clicking the Delete button.
| | 06:48 | You'll notice your Recycle Bin, if it
was empty like mine, it's no longer empty.
| | 06:53 | That's just another folder on your computer.
| | 06:56 | So you can go to the Recycle Bin, and
when you double-click it, notice it opens
| | 07:01 | up as separate window here.
| | 07:02 | We see anything that we've deleted and
added to the Recycle Bin, and check it out here.
| | 07:07 | There's a new Manage tab with the
Recycle Bin Tools appearing here.
| | 07:12 | So we can restore items.
| | 07:14 | We can look at the properties or
empty the Recycle Bin which would
| | 07:18 | permanently delete our files.
| | 07:20 | Well, our Trip2012, maybe we still
need it, so with it selected, we'll
| | 07:24 | restore the selected item.
| | 07:27 | When we click that, notice
it's removed from the Recycle Bin.
| | 07:29 | We can close this File Explorer window.
| | 07:33 | It's back over here in My Documents.
| | 07:36 | Now that works the same for files.
| | 07:38 | You can select files, delete
them, restore them, and so on.
| | 07:42 | So we actually do want to
permanently delete our Trip2012 folder.
| | 07:46 | Let's make sure it's selected.
| | 07:49 | Let's go to the Delete drop down
and choose Permanently Delete.
| | 07:53 | You will see that confirmation.
| | 07:55 | You have to click Yes that
you really meant to do that.
| | 07:58 | Notice, my Recycle Bin is still empty.
| | 08:01 | I've just permanently deleted it.
| | 08:03 | So those are some quick navigation
and organizational techniques we can use
| | 08:07 | here in File Explorer.
| | 08:09 | There's still more to come.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing how folders behave| 00:00 | Here in Windows 8 using File Explorer,
you'll have full control over how you
| | 00:05 | view the various folders and files
inside those folders, and how those
| | 00:09 | folders and files behave.
| | 00:11 | That's what we're going to talk about right now.
| | 00:13 | So if you're following along with me,
we have our Exercise Files folder open.
| | 00:17 | You can double click it wherever you
stored it such as the desktop to open it up.
| | 00:21 | What you're going to see here is a
default view for the various types of files
| | 00:26 | contained in this folder, because we
have a mix of pictures, we have text files,
| | 00:31 | we have music and video files here as
well, what we're looking at is called the
| | 00:37 | Default View for Details.
| | 00:40 | We're seeing the names of the files,
we're seeing the dates they were modified,
| | 00:45 | the type of file, and we're
also seeing the size of the file.
| | 00:49 | Each of these columns has its own
heading and we can rearrange these.
| | 00:52 | For example, if we click name, we're
going to see an alphabetical listing by name.
| | 00:56 | If we click name again, it's a reverse listing.
| | 01:00 | Same thing goes for dates.
| | 01:01 | If we click Date Modified,
we can sort these by date.
| | 01:05 | If we click it again, we'll see the newest ones
down to the oldest ones and then reverse that.
| | 01:12 | We can also group them by Type and
you can see all of our picture files are
| | 01:17 | together, and we can do the same with size.
| | 01:19 | What you may have noticed though is
that there's a little drop-down next to
| | 01:23 | each of these column headings as we
hover over them and that allows us to
| | 01:27 | filter out certain items.
| | 01:28 | So if you have a huge list of files
in a folder, you can filter it down to
| | 01:33 | locate the file you're looking for.
| | 01:34 | For example, if we go to Size and click the
drop-down, I see a couple of check boxes here.
| | 01:40 | I have one for large and one for huge files.
| | 01:43 | Of course, if you have many, many
more files of varying sizes, you'll have
| | 01:47 | more check boxes here.
| | 01:48 | If I only want to see the huge
files, I click that check box.
| | 01:52 | You can see it's all
whittled down to a single file.
| | 01:54 | Deselect that and go to large and I'll
see all of them except the huge files.
| | 01:58 | Deselect that, and I'm looking at all of them.
| | 02:01 | Let's just click anywhere in
an empty space to turn that off.
| | 02:04 | The same goes for dates.
| | 02:06 | If we click the Date drop-down, it's
going to look a little bit different.
| | 02:09 | Well in this case, we're going to be
looking at a calendar where we can select
| | 02:13 | the date range by clicking a date
and then using our Shift key to select
| | 02:17 | another date, and that becomes the
range and you can see one file was modified
| | 02:21 | in that date range.
| | 02:22 | You can deselect that and just
narrow it down to files that were modified
| | 02:26 | earlier this year or just
the files that were modified,
| | 02:30 | it looks like yesterday for me.
| | 02:33 | So, these are options that you can select
from the drop-downs on the column headings.
| | 02:37 | Now we can also change the way we view
things from the View Menu up here on the ribbon.
| | 02:43 | Notice in the layout
section, Details is selected.
| | 02:45 | But if you want to look at this in a
different view, such as a list, where you
| | 02:50 | lose the details, you can just
hover over it or click it like I did to
| | 02:53 | actually select it.
| | 02:55 | Now we can see actually more files if
we had them without all of the details
| | 02:59 | taking up space in this window.
| | 03:01 | Same thing goes for icons.
| | 03:03 | Small icons give you an idea of
the type of file you're looking at.
| | 03:06 | If we go to large icons, you get more
than just an icon representing the type of
| | 03:12 | file, you actually see
contents for some of these files.
| | 03:15 | Picture files, for example, become thumbnails.
| | 03:17 | You'll see a frame for
example, for a video file.
| | 03:21 | Now of course, we can't see
what's inside a music file.
| | 03:24 | It's audio but we do see the headphones.
| | 03:27 | Here's a text file.
| | 03:28 | It's actually a PDF file and we'll see
an icon representing the reader that is
| | 03:33 | used to open up a file of this type.
| | 03:35 | We can even go all the
way up to extra large icons.
| | 03:39 | Let's go back to Details.
| | 03:40 | Now we can also pick and choose what
details are going to be displayed here.
| | 03:45 | There are different ways to do that.
| | 03:47 | We're going to start by choosing
the Properties of the folder.
| | 03:51 | So in this case, we can either right
click anywhere in the folder or we could
| | 03:55 | go back to the Home tab and go to
the Properties drop down and choose
| | 04:00 | Properties from here.
| | 04:01 | Because none of the individual files
are selected, we're going to be accessing
| | 04:05 | properties for our Exercise Files folder.
| | 04:08 | We can change the name if we wanted
to and view details about the folder.
| | 04:12 | But under the Customize tab is where we
can go to change how we're viewing this.
| | 04:16 | For example, we can optimize it for
pictures, and when we do that, things are
| | 04:22 | going to happen in the background,
let me apply this by clicking Apply.
| | 04:25 | Notice that tags now appears, and it's
something that's very useful when working
| | 04:29 | with photos or pictures.
| | 04:31 | If we go back to our drop down and
change it to Documents, and then apply that
| | 04:36 | as well by clicking Apply.
| | 04:38 | The tags disappear and you can see the various
columns that are going to show up by default.
| | 04:43 | But let's just click Cancel here and
modify this ourselves by picking and
| | 04:48 | choosing the columns we want to see.
| | 04:50 | Again, we go back to the View tab, and
over here on the right hand side where it
| | 04:55 | says Add Columns in the current View
section, we can use this to add and to
| | 05:00 | remove columns from our view.
| | 05:02 | Click the drop down, and you'll see
check marks next to the current columns
| | 05:05 | that are being viewed.
| | 05:06 | If we wanted to add, for example, tags
to this, we can click tags from here, and
| | 05:10 | now we have the tags column.
| | 05:13 | Let's go back to that drop down and add the
actual date it was created, not just modified.
| | 05:17 | Now we have two Date columns.
| | 05:19 | Maybe they should be together.
| | 05:20 | Let's click and drag from the column
heading, move it over just after Date
| | 05:25 | Modified and before Type.
| | 05:26 | Now we have a new column that we can sort by.
| | 05:29 | If we want to remove them, we just go
back to that same drop down and click
| | 05:32 | anything that's already checked.
| | 05:34 | Maybe we don't need tags, and we'll go
back to the Add Columns drop down and
| | 05:38 | take out the Date Created.
| | 05:40 | We're back where we started.
| | 05:42 | Other options that are kind of
important are in the Show/Hide section.
| | 05:46 | If you wanted to, you could add Item
Check Boxes by clicking the check box.
| | 05:50 | Now, you're going to see
check boxes next to each of these.
| | 05:53 | It's a great way, for example, if you
want to pick and choose various files that
| | 05:57 | needed to be moved, copied,
or deleted for example.
| | 06:00 | You'll also see it for the folder
itself back here in the desktop.
| | 06:05 | If we deselect that, the
check boxes disappear. I like it.
| | 06:09 | It's a great way to select the
files that you want to work with.
| | 06:12 | We can also view filename extensions from here.
| | 06:15 | A lot of people like this.
| | 06:16 | Yeah, we know it's a JPEG file but seeing
.jpg at the end really confirms that for us.
| | 06:23 | So it's up to you if you want to see those
or just simply leave the Type column there.
| | 06:26 | I'm going to turn that back off.
| | 06:28 | If you wanted to see hidden files, of
course there are number of hidden files in
| | 06:32 | Microsoft Windows, that can be turned on.
| | 06:34 | There aren't any hiding except that
you may have a version of the volunteer
| | 06:39 | orientation letter hiding away in there
backup and you won't see that unless you
| | 06:43 | choose Hidden Files.
| | 06:44 | So we'll deselect that as well.
| | 06:47 | So those are some of the options for
picking and choosing how your files will
| | 06:51 | be displayed within folders and how
those files and folders behave here
| | 06:56 | in File Explorer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching for files and file contents| 00:00 | If you were following along with me in
the previous lesson, we explored a number
| | 00:04 | of options here in File Explorer that
would allow us to whittle down our list of
| | 00:08 | files making it easier for us to
find the files, we wanted to work with.
| | 00:11 | Well, probably the best option for
locating files is to use the built-in search
| | 00:16 | functionality and that's what
we're going to look at right now.
| | 00:19 | I'm going to use my exercise files folder.
| | 00:21 | If you have them you can use that
or choose any folder of your liking.
| | 00:25 | If we want to find certain files, all
we have to do is go to this search field
| | 00:30 | which appears over to the right
hand side of this window and click.
| | 00:33 | Look what happens to our ribbon, a new
search tab appears and we have a number
| | 00:36 | of different options like locations,
refinement properties as well as options.
| | 00:41 | We'll get to those momentarily.
| | 00:43 | Right now, let's just type
something in the search field.
| | 00:46 | Let's say, we are looking for
the word "easy." We type that in.
| | 00:49 | You don't need to press enter or anything.
| | 00:51 | It automatically displays results on
the fly and there's one file with the word
| | 00:55 | easy in the name of the file.
| | 00:57 | We can see it they are "Easy
For You" it's our MP3 music file.
| | 01:01 | All right, let's click the X next to
that to take away that search criteria and
| | 01:06 | we're back to viewing all of our files.
| | 01:08 | Let's try another one.
| | 01:09 | Let's type in this S-A-M-O-C-A.
| | 01:12 | Now, that doesn't appear in any of
the names or titles of our files but
| | 01:16 | you'll notice the word "samoca" is
highlighted in multiple times here inside our PDF file.
| | 01:22 | So, in our volunteer orientation letter,
we do find the word "samoca" multiple times,
| | 01:28 | so we're able search for contents
of our files from here not just the
| | 01:32 | file names, all right.
| | 01:35 | Let's remove that search by clicking
the X, and let's go back to our search tab
| | 01:40 | now and take a look at some of the options.
| | 01:42 | If you want to search your entire
computer you can do that by clicking computer.
| | 01:46 | The current folder would just be the folder
we're looking at right now, Exercise Files.
| | 01:50 | If there were sub-folders, they
wouldn't be included in our search or we can
| | 01:54 | also choose to include
sub-folders if we have any.
| | 01:57 | So, leave that selected.
| | 01:59 | And now let's go to Date modified.
| | 02:01 | Now when we click this drop down, we can
find files that were modified let's say
| | 02:05 | within the last year. Let's click that.
| | 02:08 | Well, it looks like no items match our search.
| | 02:12 | You'll notice also in the Search
field that we see that criteria now.
| | 02:16 | It will stay there if we wanted to combine it
with other criteria but let's just close it up.
| | 02:20 | Let's go to Size this time.
| | 02:22 | Click the drop down for Size
and we'll go to how about huge.
| | 02:27 | Do we have any huge files?
| | 02:28 | Yeah, we do, we have one.
| | 02:30 | All right, let's close that up.
| | 02:31 | Let's go back to Size now.
| | 02:33 | Click the drop down and
let's go to, how about large?
| | 02:38 | So, there are a number of large files.
| | 02:41 | Let's combine this now with another criteria.
| | 02:44 | How about the Kind file?
| | 02:45 | Let's say, we are only
looking for large picture files?
| | 02:48 | Well, in that case, we can go down
picture as a type or kind and you can see
| | 02:53 | we've whittled it down now to three files.
| | 02:55 | Notice also in the search field,
both of those criteria up here.
| | 02:59 | And yes, you could type that in yourself.
| | 03:02 | Let's just close this up with the
close bottom to return to the full list.
| | 03:06 | Now, here is something that's kind of neat.
| | 03:08 | I really like this.
| | 03:09 | The ability to save your searches,
let's say for example we know we have a
| | 03:12 | couple of gallery pictures and
we're going to have more in the future.
| | 03:16 | Well, over here on the right
hand side we could type in gallery.
| | 03:20 | And right away, there are
two files, gallery one and two.
| | 03:23 | We see some details about those
files, let's save this search.
| | 03:27 | When click Save Search, you can see
it's going to go into your user account
| | 03:32 | under searches in the Search's folder,
and we can change the name if we wanted to.
| | 03:36 | Let's type in gallery pics and click Save.
| | 03:39 | Now, that becomes a saved
search that we can use any time.
| | 03:42 | So, if we had additional gallery
pictures, a gallery of three, four or five and
| | 03:46 | so on, any time we go back to that
search, we'll be able to find it.
| | 03:51 | Notice over under Favorites, gallery pics
becomes one of your options to choose from.
| | 03:56 | So, at anytime we can go
back to our Exercise Files.
| | 04:00 | Let's go there now.
| | 04:01 | If we added some more gallery pics, we
could click the gallery pics Favorite
| | 04:05 | and we'll locate all of our gallery
pics at least with gallery in the name,
| | 04:10 | a nice little feature.
| | 04:11 | If at anytime you no longer need
that search, you don't want it in your
| | 04:15 | favorites, right click it over
here and just choose to remove it.
| | 04:18 | Now it will remain in your Searches
folders, so you have to go to the Searches
| | 04:23 | folder if you wanted to
remove it from there as well.
| | 04:25 | So, I'm going to go to my User Account
folder, double-click Searches. There it is.
| | 04:31 | I can right-click it from here
or click ones and choose Delete.
| | 04:35 | It's up to you how you do it but it's
gone and now we no longer have that search
| | 04:40 | saved in our File Explorer.
| | 04:43 | So, we will go back to Exercise
Files here and those are just some of the
| | 04:47 | options for finding the files that you
want to work with here in File Explorer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Simplifying organization with libraries| 00:00 | One really nice feature here in
Windows 8 to help you stay organized with the
| | 00:04 | various files and folders on your
computer is something called Libraries.
| | 00:08 | It was introduced in Windows 7, it's
also here in Windows 8, but it works a
| | 00:13 | little bit differently in how
we add things to our library.
| | 00:15 | So that's what we are going to do right now.
| | 00:18 | Now, in the previous lesson, we added
our Exercise Files to our Favorites.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to show you where we
can do that from the Ribbon as well.
| | 00:25 | But, the Exercise Files
contains different types of files.
| | 00:27 | It contains some pictures, contains a text
document, a video, it contains a music file.
| | 00:33 | As we move down the left hand side in the
Navigation pane, we arrive at Libraries.
| | 00:37 | If we click that folder, and it looks
like any other folder, you're going to
| | 00:41 | see the contents over here on the right hand
side as well as beneath the Libraries folder.
| | 00:46 | These are the defaults:
| | 00:47 | Documents, Music, Pictures, and Videos.
| | 00:50 | What Libraries are and how they differ
from regular folders, is they're simply
| | 00:54 | references to other locations.
| | 00:56 | For example, if we select Documents,
over here on the right-hand side, you'll
| | 01:00 | see that Documents under Libraries is
made up of a My Documents folder which
| | 01:05 | happens to be on the hard-drive under
Users, and you'll see your own name.
| | 01:08 | Also includes Public Documents;
| | 01:10 | a different location, and we can add
additional locations to this library.
| | 01:15 | So if you have documents stored in many
different locations, you can reference
| | 01:20 | them all directly from the Documents
Library by adding them to this library.
| | 01:25 | Let's say we want to add our
Exercise Files to the Documents Library.
| | 01:28 | All we have to do is locate that folder.
| | 01:31 | Mine is on the desktop.
| | 01:32 | So I'm going to click Desktop.
| | 01:33 | Over here on the right-hand side,
I find my Exercise Files folder.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to select it.
| | 01:38 | And now, the quickest way is to go up
to the Ribbon in the New section here
| | 01:42 | and click Easy Access.
| | 01:44 | Now, you'll notice a number of
different options including pinning it to the
| | 01:48 | Start Menu if we wanted to.
| | 01:50 | We could also include it in
the library, aha! Which library?
| | 01:54 | We go over to the right and select it.
| | 01:57 | Notice also we can add to Favorites
from here and map it as a drive.
| | 02:00 | But, we want to include it
in the Documents library.
| | 02:03 | So as we move up to include in library and
move over to the right, click Documents.
| | 02:08 | And it stays in its original location;
| | 02:10 | the files remain in the folder on the desktop.
| | 02:14 | But, as we move over to Documents now
under Libraries and click there,
| | 02:18 | you'll notice a new location has been added,
and we have quick and easy access to,
| | 02:23 | for example, our text document here.
| | 02:25 | So, they all reside in their original
locations, but they're easily accessible
| | 02:29 | and referenced here in the Documents Library.
| | 02:32 | In fact, if we wanted to, we
could add the Exercise Files folder
| | 02:35 | to another library as well.
| | 02:37 | Since there are pictures in there,
let's add it to the Pictures folder.
| | 02:40 | Again, we'll go back to the location
where our Exercise Files are located,
| | 02:45 | mine on the desktop, select the folder.
| | 02:47 | Let's go back up again to Easy Access>
Include in Library, and we'll include it
| | 02:53 | in the Pictures library as well.
| | 02:54 | So now, it's included in
two different libraries.
| | 02:56 | If we go down to Pictures,
we see it there as well.
| | 03:00 | So, libraries can really help you stay
organized and get to your files quickly
| | 03:04 | without having to navigate
through lengthy paths, for example.
| | 03:08 | You can include network drives;
| | 03:10 | you can include other user accounts for
example, if there are other users that
| | 03:14 | log in to the same computer.
| | 03:16 | You can go into their files and include
their folders in your libraries if you
| | 03:20 | have access to them as well.
| | 03:23 | So, libraries can really simplify your life,
| | 03:25 | a nice little feature here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying files with pause and resume| 00:00 | When it comes to moving and copying your
files here in File Explorer in Windows 8,
| | 00:04 | there are some functions that will
simplify your life when performing these
| | 00:08 | types of tasks and we're
going to take a look at them now.
| | 00:11 | Let's say for example, we want to back up
the files in our Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:15 | I've selected it over
here in the navigation pane.
| | 00:18 | Really, you could work with any
folder and any files if you don't have
| | 00:22 | the Exercise Files.
| | 00:23 | And if we wanted to back these
up, it would mean copying them;
| | 00:25 | copying them to another location.
| | 00:27 | So all we need to do is
choose that location if it exists.
| | 00:31 | We can do it all from one window.
| | 00:33 | We don't need a second window.
| | 00:34 | We don't need to click and drag selected
files, using a booster key like the
| | 00:39 | Alt key to copy and not move.
| | 00:41 | Don't worry about it, we can do it all from
here, and that's exactly what we're going to do.
| | 00:46 | But first, we're going to create a new
folder that we're going to copy these to.
| | 00:50 | And it's going to be on the desktop.
| | 00:52 | So, let's click Desktop.
| | 00:53 | Now we can go up to the
ribbon, click New Folder.
| | 00:56 | As long as the Home Tab is selected here
in the New section, you can click a New
| | 01:00 | folder, and just type in Backup.
| | 01:02 | Notice it types right over the new
folder name that appeared by default, press
| | 01:07 | Enter and we now have a new
folder on our Desktop. It's empty.
| | 01:10 | Now, if we want to get the files from
our Exercise Files folder into there,
| | 01:14 | we just go back to the Exercise Files,
select the ones we want to back up.
| | 01:18 | If it's all of them, just click the
first one, hold down Shift and click the
| | 01:22 | last one, they're all selected.
| | 01:23 | Notice there's also a Select All
button up here in the Select section of
| | 01:28 | the Home Tab ribbon.
| | 01:29 | So, from here, with our files selected,
we go back to the Organize section
| | 01:34 | now and click Copy To.
| | 01:36 | And if you see the location called
Backup on this list, you would select it,
| | 01:41 | but we don't.So we need to go down to
the bottom and click Choose Location.
| | 01:45 | And under Desktop is where you'll find
Backup, we'll make sure that's selected.
| | 01:49 | It shows up as the folder and all
we need to do now is click Copy.
| | 01:53 | Now, it won't take very long.
| | 01:55 | It's not many files, they're not huge.
| | 01:56 | If they were and it did take a lot of
time to copy or back up these files,
| | 02:01 | you might even see a Pause button,
an opportunity to pause the copy.
| | 02:05 | Go do something else to free up
resources, and then come back to copying
| | 02:10 | and it's a nice little feature
that's new here in Windows 8.
| | 02:13 | But, these were very quick,
they're in the Backup folder now.
| | 02:16 | So, what happens if we were to change
one of the files in our Exercise Files and
| | 02:21 | try to back up again?
| | 02:22 | That's the real beauty here of File Explorer.
| | 02:25 | So, let's go back to the Exercise Files
and let's say we wanted to open up Swatch.
| | 02:30 | Well, all we're going to
do is right-click Swatch.
| | 02:33 | We could use Open which will
automatically just open it up in a viewer.
| | 02:37 | That's not exactly what we want to do.
| | 02:39 | We want to work with this
file and make a change to it.
| | 02:43 | So, as we move a little further down this
pop-up menu, you can see we can open it with.
| | 02:48 | There it is;
| | 02:49 | photos, there's the viewer.
| | 02:50 | We could even choose a default
program but let's just choose Paint.
| | 02:53 | So it's going to open up the Paint
program, and there is our Swatch.
| | 02:57 | Now right now, we can't see a
whole lot of it. It's quite huge.
| | 03:01 | And as we scroll down, you can
see it really is just a swatch.
| | 03:06 | So, let's change the view here.
| | 03:07 | We'll click the View Tab,
and let's just zoom out.
| | 03:10 | We'll click Zoom Out one, two, maybe three times
so we can see the entire thing. It is selected.
| | 03:16 | You can see the handles around the outside.
| | 03:18 | Let's say we just want to rotate this.
| | 03:20 | So, we'll go back to the Home Tab and
we will rotate it by clicking the Rotate
| | 03:24 | dropdown, and choose Rotate
Right 90 degrees. There it is!
| | 03:28 | We've changed it.
| | 03:29 | The Save button appears right at
the top on the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 03:33 | You could also use the keyboard
shortcut, Ctrl+S. So we save it up.
| | 03:37 | We'll close up Paint, and
our file has now changed.
| | 03:40 | So, one of the things you'll see is the
date modified has changed to the current date.
| | 03:44 | All right!
| | 03:45 | So if we wanted to back these up again,
and we weren't sure which ones we had
| | 03:49 | changed, which ones hadn't,
we would select them all again.
| | 03:52 | This time, I'm going to click Select All
from the Select section on the Home Tab.
| | 03:56 | Let's go back to Copy To.
| | 03:58 | We'll choose Backup.
| | 04:00 | It may now appear here on the list, and
that's because it's been recently used.
| | 04:06 | So, we'll click Backup, and all of a
sudden this little message pops up.
| | 04:09 | So, it looks like we're
going to be copying six items.
| | 04:13 | The destination has six
files with the same names.
| | 04:15 | Do we want to just replace them all?
| | 04:18 | Do we want to skip them?
| | 04:19 | Not really, or do we want to
decide for each file? Let's go there.
| | 04:23 | So, we click Decide, and what you're
going to see now is a list of all of your
| | 04:27 | files with checkboxes.
| | 04:28 | On the left, we have our Exercise
Files, where they're going to, the Backup
| | 04:31 | folder over here on the right.
| | 04:33 | We also have at the very bottom as we
scroll through our files looking at the
| | 04:38 | differences, for example here
Swatch, we can see has changed from the
| | 04:42 | previous, changed in size, the date,
and you can see it has been rotated even
| | 04:47 | looking at the thumbnail.
| | 04:48 | So, you can see that automatically File
Explorer knows there are five files with
| | 04:53 | the exact same name, date, and size.
| | 04:56 | We can choose to skip those right from here.
| | 04:58 | So we don't have to go through each of
them manually selecting the ones that we
| | 05:02 | want to copy for example.
| | 05:04 | So, we'll skip five files, and that leaves
us with the only one that's changed. Perfect!
| | 05:10 | So, when we go over to the checkbox here,
if we select both versions, the copied
| | 05:14 | file will have a number added to its name.
| | 05:16 | So, which one do we want to keep?
| | 05:19 | This is the one we want, the newest one.
| | 05:21 | So we click Continue, and it replaces the
older one and you can see now we're up-to-date.
| | 05:27 | Our Backup is up-to-date.
| | 05:30 | So, that's just a couple of the new
features built into File Explorer here in
| | 05:35 | Windows 8 that will simplify your life
when it comes to manipulating your files
| | 05:39 | like creating a backup using the Copy function.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Windows 8 AppsManaging mail with the Mail app| 00:00 | Well, it's time now to get into some
of the metro-style apps that come with
| | 00:04 | Windows 8 beginning with the one that
appears in the very top left-hand corner
| | 00:08 | of the start screen by
default and that is the Mail app.
| | 00:11 | Let's give that tile a click.
| | 00:14 | If you're already logged in to a
Microsoft account like me, it opens right up.
| | 00:18 | If you're not or you don't have an
account, you'll be prompted to set it up now.
| | 00:22 | Pause this video and complete the steps
if you'd like to follow along with me.
| | 00:26 | Now, the Mail app allows you to
connect to several mail accounts and access
| | 00:31 | them from one screen.
| | 00:33 | And if you've already logged in using
your Microsoft account, you're likely
| | 00:37 | looking at the Default Mail app.
| | 00:39 | For me, you can see that's Hotmail.
| | 00:40 | So my Hotmail account by
default is set up for me.
| | 00:44 | And over here in the left-hand side, I
see Hotmail as the title, and I have an
| | 00:48 | Inbox, Drafts, Sent Items, Outbox,
et cetera all the way down to deleted items
| | 00:52 | where I can access all of those folders.
| | 00:55 | Also, you'll see over here on the
left-hand side the titles for any messages in
| | 00:59 | my selected Inbox, and whichever one
is selected, I'll see the details of to
| | 01:05 | the right-hand side.
| | 01:06 | There are some options in the top-right
corner as well for creating new messages.
| | 01:11 | Notice Ctrl+N is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:14 | There's a Reply or a Respond button,
Ctrl+R. And we can delete messages by
| | 01:19 | clicking the trash can, Ctrl+D
being the keyboard shortcut there.
| | 01:23 | But how do we add new accounts?
| | 01:25 | Let's say we have several mail accounts
and we want to be able to access them
| | 01:29 | all from here in the Mail App.
| | 01:31 | All you need to do is access the Settings.
| | 01:33 | Now, we can move to a hot corner in the
top-right or bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:37 | And when we see the
charms appear, click Settings.
| | 01:40 | Because we're in the Mail App,
we're going to see Mail Settings.
| | 01:44 | Sure enough, at the top Mail, By
Microsoft Corporation, and here's where we
| | 01:48 | can go to our accounts.
| | 01:49 | Click Accounts, you'll see existing
accounts like my Hotmail account here.
| | 01:54 | But, we can also add accounts.
| | 01:56 | And when we click the Add an Account link,
look at all the different types of
| | 02:00 | accounts we can add.
| | 02:02 | Other Hotmail accounts if you have more
than one, including Live and MSN accounts.
| | 02:07 | Outlook has Exchange, Office 365,
and Outlook.com accounts;
| | 02:11 | Google or Gmail, other accounts if
it's not listed here, AOL and Yahoo!
| | 02:17 | So select one that applies to you.
| | 02:18 | For me, I'm going to go to Yahoo!
| | 02:21 | When we click this, now all we need
is our email address and our password.
| | 02:24 | It's as simple as that.
| | 02:25 | So I'm going to type in mine
driverslynda@rogers.com, use the Tab key or click
| | 02:34 | in the Password field and type in your
password which you won't see by default.
| | 02:39 | If you do want to see what you're typing,
you can click this little icon that
| | 02:42 | appears off to the right-hand
side inside the field.
| | 02:45 | But, I'm okay with hiding my contents.
| | 02:48 | Clicking Connect is going to
connect me to my Rogers Yahoo! account,
| | 02:52 | and you can see right away, it appears.
| | 02:55 | Now, there might be an issue
because I was taken out of the Mail App.
| | 02:58 | I can go right back to it by clicking
the Mail tile again where I'll see my
| | 03:03 | accounts and I might see that there's an issue.
| | 03:06 | Over here, I'm looking
again at my Hotmail account.
| | 03:08 | If I go down to Rogers and click there,
and go to my Settings, this time I'm
| | 03:13 | going to use the keyboard shortcut,
Windows and the letter I and go over to
| | 03:17 | Accounts here where I'll see
now that I have two accounts.
| | 03:21 | Notice that my Rogers
account says Check Settings.
| | 03:23 | And you may run into this issue.
| | 03:25 | When we click our Rogers account, the
message here is that there was a problem
| | 03:29 | downloading items as they arrive.
| | 03:31 | So, let's take a look at some of the
options you can adjust here for your
| | 03:34 | various mail accounts.
| | 03:36 | First of all, the name of the
account, mine is just Rogers right now.
| | 03:39 | I'm going to type in Yahoo as
well because it is Rogers Yahoo.
| | 03:44 | Down below is my temporary email address.
| | 03:47 | Down below that, you'll see some of the
options like downloading new email and
| | 03:52 | it is set by default as items arrive.
| | 03:54 | So, I'm going to click this and choose
something other than As Items Arrive and
| | 03:58 | choose something like Every 15 Minutes.
| | 04:02 | Also, we can choose when we download email.
| | 04:05 | You can see email from the
last two weeks has been added.
| | 04:09 | But, if you have more, you can go from the
last month or anytime to get them all in there.
| | 04:14 | Also, you can see that
email is going to be synced up.
| | 04:18 | So the content to sync, the
only option here is email.
| | 04:21 | And as we work in our Yahoo accounts on
other computers, it's going to be synced
| | 04:25 | up here in our Mail App in Windows 8.
| | 04:29 | Do we automatically want to see
images and have them downloaded?
| | 04:32 | That can be turned off, it's on by default.
| | 04:35 | Let's scroll a little further down.
| | 04:37 | Also, we can use a signature.
| | 04:38 | The default signature is sent from Windows mail.
| | 04:41 | You'll see that at the bottom of
any messages you create, and send off.
| | 04:44 | But, you can change that.
| | 04:46 | You can turn it right off or
you can leave it on and change it.
| | 04:49 | I'm going to add something to this.
| | 04:51 | I'm going to type-in D. Rivers, hit Return, and
now I've got D. Rivers Sent from Windows Mail.
| | 04:58 | Also down below that, you're going to
see the email address that's being used.
| | 05:02 | I mentioned this is temporary.
| | 05:03 | I'm only using it for this title.
| | 05:05 | So it's not a real email address.
| | 05:07 | But, the password can be changed from here well.
| | 05:10 | The Email username can be changed.
| | 05:12 | By default, it's going to be
the same as the email address.
| | 05:15 | I'm going to leave it like that.
| | 05:17 | And you might see other info like the
incoming server, does it require software
| | 05:23 | security license, you can see the SSL is there.
| | 05:27 | Use the same user name and
password to send and receive email.
| | 05:30 | That's set by default.
| | 05:32 | And email notifications for this
account by default are turned off.
| | 05:36 | So while I'm working in Windows 8, I'm
not going to see little pop up saying
| | 05:40 | that I've got new mail.
| | 05:41 | You can choose to turn that on.
| | 05:43 | But, I'm going to leave mine off.
| | 05:45 | Also, you'll see Special Folders.
| | 05:47 | For example, for sent items, if we click
the dropdown, we could choose to change
| | 05:51 | that to Deleted Items.
| | 05:53 | You can choose the folders that you're
going to see over there on the left-hand side.
| | 05:56 | I'm going to click Deleted Items, and
Sent Items, and leave Junk Mail at the bottom.
| | 06:03 | Lastly is the Remove Account option,
and that is available to us because it's
| | 06:07 | one that we've added, it's not our default
account that we signed into Windows 8 with.
| | 06:11 | What do I mean by that?
| | 06:13 | Well, let's just scroll up to the top here.
| | 06:15 | Make sure everything looks good
before we hit the Back button, and go to
| | 06:19 | our Hotmail account.
| | 06:20 | For me, it's Hotmail.
| | 06:21 | That's my Windows account that I use to log in.
| | 06:24 | You'll see yours at the top.
| | 06:25 | And as we scroll down to the bottom of
these settings, which is not quite as many
| | 06:29 | settings, notice that Remove
Account is not an option for me.
| | 06:33 | And if I wanted to, I would have to go
into More PC Settings under Settings to
| | 06:38 | be able to go in and
remove this account. All right.
| | 06:41 | I'm going to hit the Back button to go back,
hit it again, and I'm back to my Settings.
| | 06:47 | So again, if I wanted to, I could go to
Change PC Settings and where I see More
| | 06:52 | Settings, if I needed to delete my
Hotmail account, I could from there.
| | 06:56 | I'm going to just click over
here in the left-hand side.
| | 06:58 | I'm now looking at my Rogers Yahoo account.
| | 07:01 | If I wanted to change to Hotmail,
I can do that by clicking Hotmail.
| | 07:04 | And, as you add additional accounts,
they will show up down here at the bottom.
| | 07:08 | The one that is selected, you'll
see the title in the top-left corner.
| | 07:12 | So, let's create a new message now.
| | 07:14 | Clicking the Plus (+) sign allows you
to create new messages, Ctrl+N being
| | 07:18 | the keyboard shortcut.
| | 07:19 | You can add who it's going to, a CC if
you want more, you can show more, like a
| | 07:25 | blind carbon copy and setting priorities.
| | 07:28 | Notice the default over here for my
signature is just sent from Windows Mail.
| | 07:35 | If I was doing this from my Rogers mail,
I'd see D. Rivers in there, the actual
| | 07:39 | change I made to my signature.
| | 07:41 | I'm going to type-in the name
of this guy named D. Rivers.
| | 07:46 | There he is at Hotmail.
| | 07:49 | I don't need to CC or BCC anyone.
| | 07:51 | The Priority, I can set to high.
| | 07:53 | I want this to get there
ahead of other messages.
| | 07:55 | Click where it says Add a Subject;
| | 07:57 | type in Mail App in Windows 8.
| | 08:03 | Then down below where it says Add a Message,
we click, and away we go typing our
| | 08:07 | message, 'This is a new email
from the Mail App in Windows 8'.
| | 08:15 | You can type whatever you like and now
we have some buttons in the top-right
| | 08:18 | corner, one for sending this off, and
if we don't like it, we can just simply
| | 08:22 | close it up where your choices will
be to keep it as a draft or delete it.
| | 08:26 | So let's just close it. There it is!
| | 08:28 | Save as a draft, or delete the draft.
| | 08:31 | If you don't want either one of
those, go ahead and just send it off by
| | 08:34 | clicking the Send button. There we go!
| | 08:36 | And you'll notice you have
something in your Outbox.
| | 08:39 | So, that's sending off a message.
| | 08:41 | If you want to reply to a message, you
have a Reply button or Respond, Ctrl+R
| | 08:45 | being the default keyboard shortcut for that,
and then we also have a delete option,
| | 08:50 | Ctrl+D as your keyboard shortcut there.
| | 08:53 | So, that's the Mail App.
| | 08:55 | When you're done with it, you can close
it up or just switch back to the start
| | 08:59 | screen by hitting your Windows key.
| | 09:00 | To close it up, you can go to the top.
| | 09:03 | When you see the hand appear, just
click, drag it all the way down, closes up
| | 09:06 | the Mail App and returns
you to the start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Calendar app| 00:00 | The next Windows 8 metro style app
we're going to look at is the Calendar App.
| | 00:04 | It comes with Windows 8.
| | 00:06 | It automatically appears by
default on your start screen.
| | 00:09 | We've been rearranging tiles,
| | 00:10 | so mine is in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 00:13 | Find your Calendar tile and give it
a click to launch the Calendar App.
| | 00:17 | Like with the Mail App in the previous
movie, you'll be prompted to set up your
| | 00:21 | account if you haven't already.
| | 00:23 | I have, so if you still need to,
pause this video and complete the steps
| | 00:27 | if you'd like to follow along with me.
| | 00:28 | Now, by default, it's going to be using the
same account you use to log in to Windows.
| | 00:34 | Just like we saw with the Mail App, you
can set up multiple accounts, so you can
| | 00:38 | look at multiple calendars at the
same time here in the Calendar App.
| | 00:42 | You'll automatically arrive at the current
month with the current day highlighted.
| | 00:47 | You can see it's October 4th
for me as I'm recording this.
| | 00:50 | You may also see some holidays in
there such as the U.S. holidays in October.
| | 00:56 | We're going to talk about the options.
| | 00:58 | But, right now, let's just
talk about what we see here.
| | 01:00 | The default view is the monthly view.
| | 01:03 | We're seeing the entire month.
| | 01:05 | And as we move our mouse, we'll see
navigation arrows in the top right-hand
| | 01:08 | corner to move ahead, and one in the left-
hand corner at the top to move back in time.
| | 01:15 | Let's say we want to
schedule something in November.
| | 01:17 | Well, we could click the right arrow
at the top to move to November, and now
| | 01:21 | we're looking at mainly November 2012.
| | 01:25 | Now, to schedule something here in our
calendar whether it's the monthly, weekly
| | 01:29 | or daily view, all we
have to do is click the date.
| | 01:33 | So, let's say for example, there's a
Lunch and Learn beginning on November 9th
| | 01:36 | and it's going to be a monthly thing.
| | 01:38 | We just go to the square for the 9th,
click once and you're creating a new item.
| | 01:43 | Notice the flashing cursor
at the top for your title.
| | 01:45 | Let's type in Lunch and Learn.
| | 01:48 | If we wanted to, we could add more
detailed information down below where it
| | 01:52 | says, add a message.
| | 01:53 | I'm going to type in 'Monthly
lunch and learn - various topics.'
| | 02:02 | Now over here on the left
is where we find the details.
| | 02:04 | The current date is selected based
on where we clicked in the calendar.
| | 02:08 | We can change that.
| | 02:09 | We could change the month,
| | 02:10 | we could change the day, even the year.
| | 02:12 | What we do want to change
though is the start time.
| | 02:15 | So let's click the dropdown and find 12.
| | 02:18 | You may have to scroll up or down to find 12.
| | 02:20 | Of course we want this to
be PM, not 12 in the morning.
| | 02:25 | So, we'll change that as well.
| | 02:27 | It is an hour long.
| | 02:28 | But, as we click the dropdown, you can
see some of the presets here from 0 to
| | 02:33 | All Day as well as Custom.
| | 02:35 | I'm going to leave it at 1 hour. Where is this?
| | 02:39 | I'm going to type in 'Conference Room A.'
| | 02:44 | Now it does show you when you make a typo.
| | 02:46 | So we can go back and fix that.
| | 02:49 | Then down below, you'll notice the
current account that's being used.
| | 02:52 | For me, it's my Hotmail account.
| | 02:54 | If you want to do things like set up
recurring meetings like this Lunch and Learn,
| | 02:58 | and maybe have notifications sent
just before it's time, you can go to
| | 03:04 | the Show More link here, and
set up things like occurrences.
| | 03:08 | Instead of just Once, let's click the
dropdown and say this happens every month.
| | 03:13 | A reminder can be sent;
| | 03:14 | the default 15 minutes ahead of time.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to need more time than that.
| | 03:19 | I'm going to choose 1 hour.
| | 03:21 | The Status in my calendar will show up as Busy.
| | 03:23 | But if I wanted to, it could be Free,
Tentative, Out of the Office if it was at
| | 03:28 | a different location, or Working Elsewhere;
| | 03:30 | I'm going to leave Busy selected.
| | 03:32 | I could also invite other people.
| | 03:34 | And if you do that, you'll have other
people who will get invitations by email,
| | 03:39 | and if they accept, their calendars
will be populated with this as well.
| | 03:43 | If you prefer if you're sharing your
calendar not to allow people to see this,
| | 03:47 | you can make it private as well.
| | 03:49 | Let's leave it unchecked.
| | 03:51 | All we have to do now is save it.
| | 03:53 | In the top right-hand corner,
there are two options;
| | 03:55 | one is to save, the other is to
actually cancel this. So let's save it.
| | 04:00 | It takes us out and back to our Calendar,
and you'll notice the color coding
| | 04:05 | that's used by default.
| | 04:06 | Anything you put in there will be
colored differently then say the U.S. holidays
| | 04:10 | that appear here by default.
| | 04:13 | Now, that's just some of the
options that can be adjusted.
| | 04:15 | Let's start with our View.
| | 04:17 | If we right-click anywhere in
the calendar, the App Bar appears.
| | 04:20 | You'll see the current
view highlighted as month.
| | 04:23 | There are keyboard
shortcuts for each one of these;
| | 04:25 | Ctrl+1 on your keyboard will switch you to
the Day View or we can click it from here.
| | 04:30 | Ctrl+2 on your keyboard will take you
to the Weekly View. Let's try that;
| | 04:36 | Ctrl+2.
| | 04:38 | And to get back to the Monthly View,
Ctrl+3, and there we are.
| | 04:43 | We can also right-click and take a
look down at the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 04:47 | Want to get right back to the current day?
| | 04:50 | Just click Today and it also has a
keyboard shortcut, Ctrl+T as in Today.
| | 04:56 | So no matter where you are in your
calendar, you'll always be brought back
| | 04:59 | to the current date.
| | 05:00 | You can also create new events by
right-clicking and going down to New.
| | 05:05 | If it's something next year, I don't
have to navigate to next year,
| | 05:08 | I can just do it from here.
| | 05:10 | So I could choose the Month, I could choose
the Day, and I could choose the Year from here.
| | 05:17 | So, it's just a fast way to schedule
something way off in the distance
| | 05:22 | for example without having to navigate
to that location. Let's cancel this.
| | 05:26 | This time we'll go to the top-right
corner and click the Cancel button.
| | 05:29 | Notice we have the
opportunity to save this or not.
| | 05:32 | Let's choose Don't Save and we'll
return right where we left off in October.
| | 05:39 | Some of the options that we're seeing
like the U.S. holidays, the color coding,
| | 05:42 | et cetera, those are all part of the
options that you can customize just by using
| | 05:48 | the keyboard shortcut, Windows+I, or
moving to a hot corner in the top-right or
| | 05:53 | bottom right-hand corner of your screen
and accessing settings from the charms.
| | 05:57 | Your choice how you get there, but you
will be looking at settings for the calendar.
| | 06:02 | Here's where we go to Accounts just
like we did with the Mail App to add
| | 06:05 | additional accounts.
| | 06:06 | So, if you have other email accounts
that have calendars, you can add them here,
| | 06:10 | and then you can flip between the
different calendars from one application.
| | 06:15 | Let's go back, and go down to options.
| | 06:19 | Now, here's where we see
things like color coding.
| | 06:21 | Anything I put into the
calendar is appearing in blue.
| | 06:24 | That's why that Lunch
and Learn appeared in blue.
| | 06:27 | A little further down,
you can see U.S. holidays.
| | 06:31 | They show up in purple.
| | 06:32 | Any of these can be turned off as well.
| | 06:34 | If we don't want to see
those holidays, turn them off.
| | 06:37 | Click the slider to turn them back on.
| | 06:40 | There is a birthday calendar as well,
and there's color coding for that.
| | 06:44 | And if we want to change the color for
any items that we put into our calendar,
| | 06:49 | look at the dropdown and all the
different colors you can choose from.
| | 06:52 | I wanted to really stand out,
so I'm going to go for green.
| | 06:56 | So I've saved that option
automatically just by selecting it.
| | 06:59 | When I go back and just click anywhere
in the calendar, let's go ahead to the
| | 07:04 | next month where we actually put something in.
| | 07:06 | You can see the color coding has changed.
| | 07:08 | So, that's a quick look at the
Calendar App, comes with Windows 8.
| | 07:13 | When we're done with it, we can switch
back to our start screen by hitting the
| | 07:17 | Windows key on the keyboard, that's one
option, or if we actually want to close
| | 07:21 | this up, I like to go to the top.
| | 07:23 | When I see the hand, click and drag
down to the bottom of the screen, which
| | 07:27 | closes it up and also takes
us back to our start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing contacts in the People app| 00:00 | If you're like so many people these
days who are connected and active in the
| | 00:04 | social networking scene,
you're going to love this next app.
| | 00:07 | It's called the People App and it
allows you to stay connected to various
| | 00:11 | contacts, and mail accounts, and
other accounts like Facebook, and Twitter,
| | 00:15 | LinkedIn, and others.
| | 00:17 | So we're going to take a
look at the People App now.
| | 00:21 | Find the tile on your start
screen and give it a click.
| | 00:24 | If it's your very first time using this
app and you haven't set up your account yet,
| | 00:28 | you'll be prompted to do so and
then you'll see something different from
| | 00:31 | what I'm seeing here.
| | 00:33 | You'll see a list of options down the
left-hand side, things you can connect to
| | 00:36 | such as Facebook and Twitter.
| | 00:38 | You can take care of all of that first.
| | 00:41 | Now, if you've gone in here and even
browsed around ever so slightly, all of
| | 00:45 | that disappears and you see
something like what I'm looking at right now.
| | 00:49 | You'll see People at the top, the
title and then you might see your own icon
| | 00:54 | representing you, and any new
posts and so on if you're connected.
| | 00:59 | The only connection that I
have is a default connection.
| | 01:02 | You can see it in the top right-hand
corner to the Microsoft Network, and that's
| | 01:06 | because my Windows
account uses a Hotmail account.
| | 01:09 | I'm automatically connected to that and
that's why I'm seeing an actual contact;
| | 01:13 | a contact I added in the Mail App
earlier, it appears here in People.
| | 01:18 | So, how do we get connected?
| | 01:20 | That's the first thing we're going to do.
| | 01:21 | We need to access the Settings.
| | 01:23 | And as you may remember, the Windows
keyboard shortcut is Windows and the letter I
| | 01:28 | or you can go to either the top-right
or bottom left-hand hot corner and
| | 01:33 | select Settings from the Charms.
| | 01:35 | Either way, you're going to be
looking at Settings for People.
| | 01:38 | Right at the top is Accounts.
| | 01:40 | Clicking Accounts allows you to add new
accounts aside from the default account,
| | 01:45 | which is automatically connected for you.
| | 01:48 | And that is my Hotmail account and
that's why I'm seeing my only contact,
| | 01:51 | drivers@lynda.com, something I
added from the Mail App earlier.
| | 01:56 | But, here's where we go to
add an account. Let's click it.
| | 01:59 | We can add Facebook, Twitter,
Outlook, LinkedIn, even Google.
| | 02:04 | So, let's say you have a Facebook account.
| | 02:06 | You can follow along with me if you do.
| | 02:08 | If not, just take a look, and see how
easy it is to stay in touch with your
| | 02:12 | Facebook friends using the People App.
| | 02:14 | So you'll see some information about
what you can do with this connection;
| | 02:19 | chat with your Facebook
friends, see their updates here.
| | 02:21 | And in other apps and websites where
you use this Microsoft account, you'll be
| | 02:26 | able to see that information
as well. Click the link.
| | 02:29 | You'll see some more information about all
the things you can do with this connection.
| | 02:33 | You can also see what control
you have and what is shared.
| | 02:37 | If you're okay with that, click Connect, and
then you'll be prompted for some information;
| | 02:42 | your email or phone.
| | 02:43 | This is for your Facebook account.
| | 02:45 | So, I'm going to type-in drivers@lynda.com,
my temporary account, and your password.
| | 02:54 | Just like before, there's an eye icon
here if you want to see what you're typing.
| | 02:58 | Otherwise, it is hidden from view.
| | 03:00 | If you want to keep logged in,
you can do that from here as well.
| | 03:03 | So let's click Log In.
| | 03:05 | If you don't have a Facebook account, notice
you can actually create one from here as well.
| | 03:11 | So, clicking Log In not only logs you
into your Facebook account, but it also
| | 03:15 | connects you in the People App.
| | 03:18 | So, there's some information
here, Request for Permission.
| | 03:21 | You can see some notices
down the left-hand side.
| | 03:25 | Microsoft wants to connect.
| | 03:26 | Let's allow that, and we'll
be connecting to a service.
| | 03:30 | So, all we need to do now is wait a
moment for that connection to happen,
| | 03:34 | and you're ready to go.
| | 03:36 | If we wanted to add more
accounts, we can do that.
| | 03:39 | You can see there's
information about adding accounts.
| | 03:41 | Otherwise, we're done.
| | 03:43 | If we click Done, we'll arrive back at our
original screen now connected to Facebook.
| | 03:49 | So, under Social, you'll see things start
to happen here like friends' posts and more.
| | 03:55 | If we go down to the bottom-right or
top-right corner and access Settings again,
| | 04:00 | some of the other options
appear under the Options heading.
| | 04:04 | You can sort your contacts by last name.
| | 04:06 | That changes the sort order.
| | 04:08 | By default, it's turned off.
| | 04:10 | I'm going to turn that on.
| | 04:13 | Filter your contacts as well.
| | 04:14 | So, if you wanted to hide your Facebook ones,
deselect that checkbox, and they disappear.
| | 04:20 | Click it again, and they come back.
| | 04:22 | So, it's just a way to filter out contacts.
| | 04:25 | If you want to see them all, leave
everything checked off, and as you continue
| | 04:28 | to add accounts, you'll see more of those accounts
here with checkmarks in them. Let's go back.
| | 04:35 | Other Settings include Permissions.
| | 04:36 | So, if you go down to Permissions for
example, you'll see some information about
| | 04:41 | your Permissions in your internet connection.
| | 04:44 | Let's just click anywhere off to the
left of the Settings screen where we go
| | 04:48 | back to our People App.
| | 04:51 | Now we can view notifications, see
what's new in Facebook as it happens.
| | 04:54 | Also, look at our contacts from the
various accounts all in one place.
| | 04:58 | Right-click anywhere and the App Bar opens up.
| | 05:01 | You can see some options down here.
| | 05:04 | We can always go back to the Home screen by
clicking Home which is where we are right now.
| | 05:08 | But, if I went to a contact for example
and started reading information, notice
| | 05:13 | there's a scrollbar now
if I want to scroll over.
| | 05:17 | Again, right-clicking and choosing
Home is going to take me back to my Start.
| | 05:22 | Right-click again, and let's go down to
the bottom right-hand corner this time.
| | 05:26 | You'll notice something called Online only:
| | 05:28 | Show only online contacts.
| | 05:30 | So, you won't see contacts that
are not part of the online community.
| | 05:35 | Over here we have New
where we can add new contacts.
| | 05:38 | Adding your own contacts manually
typically will not be online contacts but just
| | 05:43 | information let's say you have in an
address book, and you want to be able to
| | 05:46 | access it from here.
| | 05:48 | So, clicking New allows you to type-in
if there is an account, a first name, a
| | 05:53 | last name, company name.
| | 05:55 | You can see all of the information
including addresses, phone numbers, other info.
| | 06:00 | Just click a Plus (+) sign to be able
to choose other info for example that you
| | 06:04 | want to be able to add about that
contact, and then save it when you're done.
| | 06:09 | We'll click Cancel.
| | 06:10 | But, that's how you add
your own contacts manually.
| | 06:13 | When we're done, we can close this up again
by moving our mouse to the top of the screen.
| | 06:18 | When we see the hand, click, drag
straight down to the bottom of your
| | 06:22 | screen, and release.
| | 06:23 | That takes us back to our start
screen where we'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sending instant messages with Messaging| 00:00 | Instant Messaging is an excellent
way to chat with people online, have a
| | 00:04 | real-time conversation by
typing messages back and forth.
| | 00:08 | I use it often when I need to
contact people with questions that
| | 00:12 | require immediate answers.
| | 00:13 | Well, here in Windows 8, there's
a Messaging App that allows you to
| | 00:16 | connect multiple accounts so you can do your
chatting or instant messaging from one location.
| | 00:21 | We're going to take a look at it now.
| | 00:23 | Find the Messaging tile right here on
your start screen and give it a click.
| | 00:27 | It is a metro style app, so it's
going to open up in full screen.
| | 00:31 | Again, if you haven't added your
Microsoft account yet, you'll be prompted first
| | 00:34 | to do that before you can use the Messaging App.
| | 00:37 | For me to get into Windows 8,
I'm using my Hotmail account,
| | 00:40 | so I'm automatically connected.
| | 00:42 | If I look to the top right-hand corner,
I'll see that indeed, I am connected to
| | 00:46 | Instant Messaging via my Hotmail account.
| | 00:50 | I'm also connected apparently through Facebook.
| | 00:52 | How did that happen?
| | 00:54 | Earlier on in this chapter when we were
talking about Contacts using the People
| | 00:57 | App, we connected to Facebook.
| | 00:59 | So, I'm automatically connected to
those people as well right from here.
| | 01:04 | So, as you can see, I do have a
couple of messages from the Windows team.
| | 01:08 | These are messages I can't reply to.
| | 01:11 | Over here on the left, I
can start a new message.
| | 01:14 | I can read selected messages.
| | 01:16 | The one that's selected right now is
the only message appearing here on the left,
| | 01:19 | and then down at the bottom, you
can see I can add or manage an account
| | 01:24 | by going to the Settings.
| | 01:25 | So I can click OK here once
I've read that and it disappears.
| | 01:29 | So let's check out those Settings
using our keyboard shortcut;
| | 01:32 | Windows and the letter I is the same as
going to a hot corner in the top-right
| | 01:37 | or bottom-right corner and selecting Settings.
| | 01:39 | We're going to see Settings
for of course our Messaging App.
| | 01:43 | When we click Accounts, we'll see
exactly what we're currently connected to
| | 01:47 | here at the top, and if you're not
connected to both of these, you can click
| | 01:51 | Add an Account to connect to them.
| | 01:53 | Notice when I click Add an Account, I'm
already connected to all of the accounts
| | 01:58 | available for this app.
| | 01:59 | So it's really just
Instant Messenger and Facebook.
| | 02:03 | I'll go back and check out
some of the Options as well.
| | 02:07 | Under Options, there's only one, and that
is to either send and receive message or not.
| | 02:12 | So I can turn this off at any time and
I won't be receiving any new messages.
| | 02:15 | If I need privacy, I need calm
and quiet, I can turn this off.
| | 02:19 | If I don't mind getting those messages, I can
turn it back on by clicking the same slider.
| | 02:25 | Let's just click anywhere over here outside
of our Settings to go back to using Messaging.
| | 02:29 | How about have a conversation?
| | 02:32 | We go up here to the top-left corner
where it says New Message and click there.
| | 02:35 | It's going to take us to our People App
where we can choose from our Contacts.
| | 02:40 | Who do we want to have a conversation with?
| | 02:43 | Here, I only have two contacts in People so far.
| | 02:46 | This guy is from Facebook.
| | 02:48 | This one is from my Windows account.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to choose drivers@lynda.com.
| | 02:53 | Now, that person is checked off.
| | 02:55 | If I wanted to include Mark, I
could as well by clicking there.
| | 02:59 | But, I really want to have the conversation
with drivers@lynda.com, so I'll click Choose.
| | 03:04 | Now, when I do that, I arrive
back here ready to start typing.
| | 03:09 | What I'm going to see here is drivers@lynda.com
in Messenger, and me over here,
| | 03:15 | and you can see my current status is Available.
| | 03:17 | Down below, I have a flashing cursor.
| | 03:20 | Now, it does say that drivers@lynda.com
is offline but I can still send a message.
| | 03:25 | They may just be appearing offline.
| | 03:27 | So, I'm going to type in my
message 'How are you finding Windows 8?'
| | 03:34 | When I hit Enter, you can
see the message has begun.
| | 03:37 | I started a brand new thread.
| | 03:38 | It shows me that today on Messenger
I typed this in at this specific time.
| | 03:43 | Now, I can sit here waiting for a
reply and the thread will continue.
| | 03:47 | Let's just right-click anywhere now
and look at some of the other options.
| | 03:51 | Down below, I can see my own
status and set it from here.
| | 03:54 | Let's click Status. I am available.
| | 03:57 | If I want to appear invisible, I can do
that as well, but I'm going to stay Available.
| | 04:01 | From here under Invite, I can choose
more contacts and invite people to
| | 04:07 | messaging and connect with me.
| | 04:08 | So, this will take me out of here,
probably open up Internet Explorer,
| | 04:12 | and I would go into for example my
Hotmail account to invite people.
| | 04:16 | I can get a report, and I
can delete a thread from here.
| | 04:20 | Obviously, this conversation is not happening.
| | 04:22 | I'm going to click Delete, confirm
that by clicking Delete again, and
| | 04:27 | that thread disappears.
| | 04:29 | That's how we have Instant Messages
now in Windows 8 using the Messaging App.
| | 04:35 | It is a metro app that allows you to
connect to your Hotmail, Instant Messenger.
| | 04:40 | You can also connect to your Facebook
and have instant messages going on with
| | 04:45 | those contacts here in the Messaging App.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with the Photos app| 00:00 | Well, almost everybody these days has
at least one digital camera, and most
| | 00:04 | people are using their computers to
store the photos that they take with
| | 00:08 | those digital cameras.
| | 00:10 | Some are using online options
like Flickr accounts, Facebook.
| | 00:14 | Wouldn't it be nice if we could locate
all of our photos no matter where they
| | 00:18 | are from one location? We can.
| | 00:20 | It's called the Photos App and that's
what we're going to look at right now.
| | 00:24 | So, let's click the Photos tile
from our start screen to get in.
| | 00:28 | Now right away, you're going to see some
things happening across the bottom of your screen.
| | 00:31 | You might see some pictures scrolling
through here for the Pictures Library.
| | 00:35 | If you followed along with me earlier
in this title when we decided we would
| | 00:39 | take the Exercise Files folder and
include it in the Pictures Library,
| | 00:44 | automatically, those photos from our
Exercise Files are now showing up, and they
| | 00:49 | are scrolling through the thumbnail here.
| | 00:51 | We can access our pictures
Library directly from here.
| | 00:54 | The other thing we can
access is a Facebook account.
| | 00:56 | If you're connected and you have
multiple photos, you'll see scrolling
| | 01:00 | action here as well.
| | 01:01 | I only have one, so it's static.
| | 01:03 | Your SkyDrive photos will show up here, as well
your Flickr photos if you have a Flickr account.
| | 01:09 | What if you don't?
| | 01:10 | Well, you'll notice Hide is
an option for each of these.
| | 01:13 | So, click Hide if you don't have
a Flickr account, and it's gone.
| | 01:17 | Yes, we can get it back.
| | 01:18 | I'll show you that momentarily.
| | 01:20 | If you're working with devices like a
digital camera or external drive, you
| | 01:24 | might see devices options down here as well.
| | 01:27 | For now though, let's just take a look
at our Pictures Library by going there.
| | 01:32 | In the Pictures Library, we now see
thumbnails, very large ones actually,
| | 01:36 | representing both video and photos.
| | 01:39 | So, as we scroll across, you can see
the first one is a video, and we get into
| | 01:44 | some photos, and that's all there is.
| | 01:46 | Now, if you had many more, you
might want to just zoom out to see more
| | 01:50 | thumbnails, and we can do that
in the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:53 | The minus (-) sign is for zooming out.
| | 01:55 | The plus (+) sign is for zooming in.
| | 01:58 | Click the plus sign, and you're zoomed in.
| | 02:00 | Click again, you're actually into a
slideshow mode, so you can use navigation
| | 02:05 | buttons on the right for moving
ahead or on the left for going back.
| | 02:10 | We can actually zoom out by clicking the
minus sign, or press Esc on your keyboard.
| | 02:13 | That will take you back as well.
| | 02:16 | Let's go back by clicking the Back
button next to Pictures Library, and
| | 02:20 | talk about devices.
| | 02:22 | That's another location where you might
have photos, your digital camera, a USB
| | 02:25 | drive. Can we go get those? You bet.
| | 02:28 | Let's just right-click anywhere in the
background here and you'll see on the App
| | 02:32 | Bar that appears an Import option.
| | 02:35 | Give it a click, and you'll see a list
of devices currently connected to your PC.
| | 02:40 | I have one, it's a removable disk.
| | 02:42 | You might have a camera there.
| | 02:44 | If you don't see your device, you
may need to turn it on or maybe try
| | 02:48 | connecting it again.
| | 02:49 | I'm going to click my removable disk.
| | 02:51 | If you have something connected, go
ahead and click it, and you'll be looking at
| | 02:55 | the contents of that device.
| | 02:58 | As you can see, I have a video and
I have some very familiar photos.
| | 03:03 | If I want to bring any of these in,
I can check them off by clicking them.
| | 03:07 | By default, they'll all be checked off.
| | 03:10 | I can clear the selection and go
back and just pick the ones I want.
| | 03:15 | Clicking them again deselects them or
just simply Select All and they'll all be
| | 03:20 | imported to a folder that by
default is named by the current date.
| | 03:24 | But, we can go in there and click that
and let's just call this Summer 2012.
| | 03:31 | Now, this will go into your Pictures Library.
| | 03:33 | So, later on when we go to File
Explorer for example, and we look at the
| | 03:37 | Pictures folder where we see our
Exercise Files, we'll also see this one
| | 03:42 | called Summer 2012.
| | 03:43 | And that's what we're
doing when we click Import.
| | 03:45 | So, you can see it's importing.
| | 03:48 | At any time, I can click Stop, kind of
stuck on the video file which is fairly large.
| | 03:54 | So, to save some time, I'm going to
click Stop right there and three of the
| | 03:57 | files were imported.
| | 03:59 | Now, I can open the folder
directly from here or just close this.
| | 04:04 | Go to my Pictures Library now
where the number has increased.
| | 04:08 | And when I click there, you'll see
this new folder called Summer 2012.
| | 04:13 | I can click that to get in
there as well. Let's go back.
| | 04:17 | That's how we import using this Photos App.
| | 04:19 | We'll go back again and we're going
to look at some of the settings now.
| | 04:23 | For example, maybe now you
do have a Flickr account.
| | 04:26 | You want to get it back here.
| | 04:27 | Let's go to the keyboard shortcut for
getting Settings up here in Windows 8.
| | 04:31 | That's Windows and the letter I.
| | 04:34 | Windows+I brings up Settings for
Photos because that's the app that we're in,
| | 04:38 | and you'll notice Options right at the top.
| | 04:40 | We'll give it a click.
| | 04:42 | Well, the shuffling of photos that we
see going on when we look at the Photos
| | 04:46 | App tile, that can be turned off
from here or left on if you prefer.
| | 04:53 | Also, down below, you can see the
Pictures Library, Facebook, SkyDrive, I have
| | 04:58 | a location or a computer called Booth, and
there's Flickr, I can get it back by clicking that.
| | 05:04 | Notice that Facebook and Flickr each
have options as well that we can select.
| | 05:09 | So when you do that, you'll
actually be taken to your account.
| | 05:13 | Here in your account, you have the
option to access additional properties.
| | 05:17 | So, I'm going to go back up here,
close up Internet Explorer, and go back to
| | 05:21 | Photos by clicking it, and
I'm right where I left off.
| | 05:25 | If I want to go back to those
settings, again, the keyboard shortcut,
| | 05:28 | Windows+I takes me back.
| | 05:31 | That's a quick look at
the Photos App in Windows 8;
| | 05:34 | a great way to stay organized, and
get access to all of your photos no
| | 05:38 | matter where they reside.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reading text with the Reader app| 00:00 | As I'm sure you're aware, the most popular
format for read-only text files is PDF,
| | 00:05 | short for Portable Document Format.
| | 00:09 | In the previous versions of Windows, to
open up those types of files, you needed
| | 00:12 | to download the free Adobe App
known as Adobe Reader.
| | 00:16 | Also, Microsoft has its own version
of a read-only format known as XPS, and
| | 00:22 | there is an XPS Viewer
for looking at those files.
| | 00:24 | But, here in Windows 8, there's a new
Reader App that allows us to open up both
| | 00:29 | those types of files, so we don't need
to download Adobe Reader, and we don't
| | 00:32 | need the XPS Viewer.
| | 00:34 | So let's take a look at the Reader App now.
| | 00:37 | Notice it does not appear here on your
Start screen by default, but it is an app
| | 00:42 | that we can access by right-clicking
anywhere in the background, and choosing
| | 00:45 | All Apps in the bottom-right
corner of our App Bar.
| | 00:49 | There it is, the Reader.
| | 00:50 | We can click this to launch it, or if
you think it's something you're going to
| | 00:53 | be using on a regular basis, why
not add it to your Start screen by
| | 00:57 | right-clicking, that checks it off,
and then going down to the App Bar and
| | 01:02 | clicking Pin to Start in
the bottom-left corner here.
| | 01:05 | Now it's pinned to our start screen,
we could launch it from here.
| | 01:09 | But, let's just hit our Windows key on
the keyboard, the shortcut to get back to
| | 01:12 | the Start screen, and you'll notice
there's a new Reader tile showing up here.
| | 01:16 | Of course, we can position that
wherever we want by clicking and dragging,
| | 01:19 | and I'm going to move mine just left of my
Paint tile and that's where I'd like to have it.
| | 01:25 | Let's click the Reader tile.
| | 01:27 | If it's your first time using this,
you'll see what I'm seeing and that is a
| | 01:30 | Browse tile for browsing and
looking for files to open and a list of
| | 01:35 | recently viewed files.
| | 01:36 | Notice they can be PDF or XPS files.
| | 01:40 | Now, until you start reading files, you
are not going to see anything here, so
| | 01:43 | let's go get a file.
| | 01:45 | We'll click the Browse tile.
| | 01:46 | Now, by default, you're probably
looking at your documents files, but we can
| | 01:50 | click Files up here.
| | 01:51 | For example, if I want to go to my
Exercise Files and you put yours on your
| | 01:55 | desktop, you could click Desktop.
| | 01:58 | You could then click Exercise Files, find
volunteer orientation letter, there it is,
| | 02:02 | and give it a click.
| | 02:05 | That only checks it off or selects it.
| | 02:08 | As you hover over this, you get some
additional information, but what we want
| | 02:12 | to do is open this up.
| | 02:13 | So, let's go to the bottom-
right corner and click Open.
| | 02:15 | Now, it's going to open up
our file in our default view.
| | 02:20 | This is called Continuous, and if we
were to scroll through this document
| | 02:24 | either using our mouse by clicking
and dragging the scrollbar button that
| | 02:28 | appears on the right-hand side, up or
down, or by using the arrows that appear
| | 02:32 | at the top and bottom.
| | 02:34 | Each click is another line down or up.
| | 02:37 | And of course, we could also use our keyboard.
| | 02:40 | Let's use our up and down arrows
to go up, or down a line at a time.
| | 02:45 | Try the Page Up and Page
Down keys on your keyboard.
| | 02:48 | Page Down takes you to the next screen
full of information, and Page Up takes
| | 02:52 | you back up through your document.
| | 02:54 | Now, this is Continuous view.
| | 02:57 | There are many other
views to choose from as well.
| | 02:59 | Let's right-click anywhere on our
document or in the background, and on the
| | 03:04 | App Bar at the bottom, you'll
see some different options;
| | 03:06 | Continuous currently highlighted.
| | 03:08 | Let's go to the next one
over to the left, One Page.
| | 03:11 | When we click that, we're now
looking at our document a page at a time.
| | 03:16 | So, this changes up our navigation slightly.
| | 03:18 | To close up the App Bar,
just click anywhere above it;
| | 03:22 | let's see what happens now when we
hit the down arrow on our keyboard,
| | 03:26 | the cursor key facing down.
| | 03:27 | Notice it takes us to the next page, not
the next line, and it fills the entire screen.
| | 03:33 | Again, it takes us to the next page and so on.
| | 03:37 | Let's go up now using the
up arrow on your keyboard.
| | 03:41 | You could use Page Up and Down as well.
| | 03:43 | They'll work exactly the same.
| | 03:44 | As we move over to the left or right
side of our screen, you're going to see
| | 03:48 | navigation buttons instead of a scrollbar;
| | 03:51 | so this will take us also to the
next page, or if we go to the left-hand
| | 03:54 | side, the previous page.
| | 03:57 | Let's go forward two or three pages, and
let's try to get back to the first page
| | 04:01 | by holding down Ctrl and
hitting Home on the keyboard;
| | 04:04 | Ctrl+Home always takes you back to the top page.
| | 04:09 | Let's right-click now, and try
another view known as Two Pages.
| | 04:13 | When we select that, we're actually
looking at two pages side by side, and now
| | 04:18 | our navigation changes again.
| | 04:20 | Just click anywhere above the App Bar to
close it up, and look what happens when
| | 04:24 | you hit the right arrow on the
right-hand side of your screen.
| | 04:26 | It takes you to the next two
pages, then the next two and so on.
| | 04:32 | You can also go back of course, and it's
always going to be two pages at a time.
| | 04:37 | Now, you can zoom in and out.
| | 04:39 | There are zoom in, and zoom out buttons.
| | 04:42 | As soon as you start doing that, you
will see scrollbars if you're not able to
| | 04:46 | see all of the content on one screen.
| | 04:48 | So, let's zoom back out until we can.
| | 04:52 | Let's right-click again, and
let's go back to Continuous.
| | 04:56 | From here, we're going to try some
other things that appear on the App Bar
| | 04:59 | like the Find feature. I like this.
| | 05:01 | We'll click Find.
| | 05:03 | Let's say we're looking for
someone's name in particular.
| | 05:06 | Now, we could start scrolling through this
if we wanted to or we could type in the name.
| | 05:11 | Let's type in loopard and
hit Enter on your keyboard.
| | 05:18 | Now, right away, you're going to
see Previous and Next buttons, and a
| | 05:21 | highlighted section of text where
it's found what you're looking for.
| | 05:26 | Clicking Next takes you to the next occurrence.
| | 05:30 | Another option is to use the
Results button over here on the right.
| | 05:33 | Click Results and you'll see other
locations, and you can jump directly to those
| | 05:38 | locations just by clicking it here.
| | 05:40 | So, page four, there's the page one,
and it's highlighted for you on that page.
| | 05:46 | Let's just click anywhere in the background
and then go down and click Close
| | 05:50 | to close up our search.
| | 05:53 | Right-click again, and now from the
App Bar, you'll see some other options.
| | 05:56 | We could open up
additional files; XPS or PDF files.
| | 05:59 | There's also Save As.
| | 06:02 | Now, when we click Save As, we're able
to save in the current format which is PDF,
| | 06:06 | but we could change the location.
| | 06:09 | So, if we wanted a copy
somewhere, that's how we do it.
| | 06:11 | Let's just click Cancel.
| | 06:14 | We'll right-click again and you'll
notice something in the bottom right-hand
| | 06:17 | corner labeled More.
| | 06:19 | There are more options, more
commands here like Rotating.
| | 06:22 | So, if you're looking at pages that seem to
be on their side, you can rotate them back.
| | 06:28 | We can also set bookmarks.
| | 06:29 | If this is a spot where we want to
go back to quickly, we click Bookmark.
| | 06:33 | You can see we have some
options here to choose from.
| | 06:37 | Let's do the SAMOCA Employee Handbook.
| | 06:40 | So any bookmarks that have been set in
this document are easily accessible from here.
| | 06:44 | Where did they come from?
| | 06:45 | They came from the author.
| | 06:47 | So, let's just click above that and
go down to More again, click there, and
| | 06:51 | click Info to see who this author is,
see when it was created, the number of
| | 06:57 | pages, the size, and the permissions.
| | 07:00 | So we're allowed to print and copy this,
fill out forms if there are any, even
| | 07:04 | add notes and highlights.
| | 07:05 | This is all set by our author, including the
bookmarks we saw when we clicked Bookmarks.
| | 07:12 | The other thing that we can
do from here is close this up.
| | 07:14 | Let's go down to More, and the last
option here on this menu is Close File,
| | 07:20 | click, and we're back to where we
started, but now, we have a Browse tile and
| | 07:25 | we have a recent document that we could go
back to quickly by simply clicking it here.
| | 07:29 | When we're done with the Reader, we can
close it up or just hit your Windows key
| | 07:34 | on the keyboard to go back to the
start screen and leave it running in the
| | 07:37 | background for any time we need it.
| | 07:39 | So that's a quick look at the Reader App,
something that's going to allow you to
| | 07:44 | open up PDF and XPS files from one
location, no need for downloading the free
| | 07:48 | Adobe Reader any longer, no
need for accessing the XPS Viewer.
| | 07:51 | You can do it all from the Reader App.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing music with the Music app| 00:00 | The next app we're going to look at
here allows you to not only browse and
| | 00:04 | purchase music, but
manage music in your library.
| | 00:07 | It is the Music App.
| | 00:08 | Before we get to it though, let's go to
our desktop, and open up File Explorer.
| | 00:13 | You can go down to the Taskbar in the
bottom-left corner, click File Explorer.
| | 00:17 | We'll take a look at our libraries,
specifically the Music Library.
| | 00:22 | You can click Music, take a look to the right.
| | 00:25 | And if you're like me and see nothing,
that's what you can expect to see in the
| | 00:29 | Music App, and we can expand this in the
Library to see that it includes folders
| | 00:34 | like My Music, and Public Music.
| | 00:36 | Neither of these folders contains any
files and that's why we're seeing nothing
| | 00:40 | over on the right-hand side.
| | 00:41 | So, keep that in mind, as we hit our
Windows key on the keyboard, and find the
| | 00:46 | Music tile which is over here for me on
the right-hand side and give it a click.
| | 00:51 | Now, when you launch the Music App which
is actually part of Xbox LIVE, a number
| | 00:55 | of things are going to happen.
| | 00:57 | You'll be signed in automatically with
the sign in you use to log in to Windows 8.
| | 01:02 | And you're going to see things like
what's playing now in the store or what we
| | 01:07 | call the marketplace.
| | 01:08 | There's a scrollbar across the bottom.
| | 01:10 | If you scroll all the way over to the
left, you may have actually seen this
| | 01:14 | initially which is the My Music section.
| | 01:17 | I'm seeing that it's lonely. Why?
| | 01:20 | Well, we just saw in our Music Library,
at least in mine, I didn't have any files.
| | 01:25 | So, I do have some options here.
| | 01:27 | Make sure Music is part of my
Windows Library under Tell me more, that's
| | 01:31 | actually going to launch Windows Explorer,
and take me to a Help file online.
| | 01:35 | I can open or play something
directly from here by clicking this link.
| | 01:39 | I'll go to File Explorer, and start
browsing for music files, or I can also go
| | 01:45 | to the Xbox Music Store.
| | 01:47 | We'll start right there with the Music
Store where we can actually go and find
| | 01:51 | different albums under different
genres, different artists, and we can make
| | 01:56 | purchases from here.
| | 01:57 | Anything we purchase from the
Music Store gets added to our Library.
| | 02:01 | Let's hit the Back button.
| | 02:03 | Another option is just to scroll off to
the right where we'll see some shortcuts.
| | 02:08 | For example, Now Playing.
| | 02:10 | We can click any of those options
and we can listen and purchase music.
| | 02:15 | Same thing, there's the Xbox Music Store
as we scroll a little further to the right.
| | 02:19 | And as we keep going, we're
also going to see Most Popular.
| | 02:22 | Let's go all the way over to the
left now, and let's say we wanted to add
| | 02:27 | something to our Music Library.
| | 02:29 | It's going to show up here under My Music.
| | 02:32 | So, press your Windows key again,
and let's go back to the desktop.
| | 02:36 | Our File Explorer should still be open,
and we're going to add a file or maybe
| | 02:41 | even an entire folder to our Music Library.
| | 02:44 | It's going to be the Exercise Files.
| | 02:46 | You can see Easy Access is applicable
here in the New section on the ribbon.
| | 02:51 | So, we'll give that a click.
| | 02:53 | We're going to include it
in the Library. Which one?
| | 02:56 | The Music Library;
| | 02:57 | fast and easy way to add it, and now
you can see under Music, we have My Music,
| | 03:01 | Public Music as well as the Exercise Files.
| | 03:04 | Because there does happen to be a music
file in there, look what happens when we
| | 03:08 | hit our Windows key on the keyboard,
and go back to Music by clicking it.
| | 03:14 | It just takes a moment, but then all of
a sudden, you can see what's happening
| | 03:18 | here, I have a music file.
| | 03:20 | It looks like the album name is
Power This, the artist, The Jellybricks.
| | 03:23 | If I click this, a little window
opens up where I can play the album.
| | 03:28 | I can add it to Now Playing.
| | 03:30 | There's the track right there,
the only one track that I can play.
| | 03:34 | And if I click it, I see a Play button,
and I can add it to my Now Playing list.
| | 03:40 | Let's just click outside, close that up.
| | 03:43 | Another option is just to
play all music in my Library.
| | 03:47 | Let's click the Play button, and
see what happens. (music playing)
| | 03:49 | So, notice down here, the App Bar does
open up once we start playing our music.
| | 04:03 | We have a Pause button.
| | 04:04 | When we click, it turns back to a Play button.
| | 04:07 | If we have multiple tracks, we can move
through them using Next and Previous buttons.
| | 04:12 | We can repeat this one, and we can
even shuffle all of our music files under
| | 04:17 | My Music from here.
| | 04:19 | On the very far left, if we wanted to,
we could open additional files as well.
| | 04:24 | Let's just click above the App Bar
anywhere, and now in the Now Playing section,
| | 04:29 | because we started to play the Easy For
You (Instrumental), that's what we see
| | 04:33 | in our Now Playing section.
| | 04:35 | Just keep in mind that all of your music
can be managed here using the Music App.
| | 04:40 | Music can be purchased from the marketplace.
| | 04:42 | It will show up in your My Music section,
and remember, files or folders you add
| | 04:47 | to the Library will also be
included in the My Music section.
| | 04:51 | Let's close this up by going up to
the very top when we see the hand;
| | 04:55 | just click and drag straight down to
the bottom of your screen and release.
| | 04:59 | That takes us back to the start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing video with the Video app| 00:00 | The Video App here in Windows 8 works
very similarly to the Music App we talked
| | 00:05 | about in the previous lesson.
| | 00:07 | So, if you are following along
with me, well, this might seem a
| | 00:09 | little repetitious.
| | 00:10 | But, we are going to explore managing your
video files now by going first to the desktop.
| | 00:16 | Click the Desktop tile, and here's
where we left off looking at our Exercise
| | 00:20 | Files inside File Explorer.
| | 00:23 | Now, if we go to the left-hand side
in our navigation pane and look at the
| | 00:28 | Videos Library, you're going to see
there is a My Videos folder and a Public
| | 00:33 | Videos folder, and for me as you
can see, I have no files in there.
| | 00:36 | If you are like me, that means you're
not going to see any files in the video app,
| | 00:41 | when we go back to our start screen.
| | 00:44 | If we want to include anything here
though just like we did with the Music App,
| | 00:47 | we can add folders and files to our library.
| | 00:50 | Let's add our Exercise
Files to this Videos Library.
| | 00:55 | So we'll go back to the desktop, select
Exercise Files, we won't open it, just
| | 00:59 | select it, and then go up to the New
section here with the Home Tab selected on
| | 01:04 | the ribbon, click the Easy Access
dropdown, move down to Include in Library, and
| | 01:09 | we'll also include this Exercise
Files folder in our videos library.
| | 01:13 | That means any video files in that
folder will now show up in our Video App.
| | 01:18 | So let's test it out.
| | 01:20 | Hit the Windows key on your keyboard, the
fastest way to get back to our start screen,
| | 01:24 | and find the Video tile.
| | 01:26 | Mine is down here near the bottom-right corner.
| | 01:29 | When we give it a click, some things
will happen just like with the Music App.
| | 01:32 | It's going to load.
| | 01:34 | You might see you getting signed in,
in the top right-hand corner if you're
| | 01:37 | already signed in to Windows 8.
| | 01:39 | And then, what you're going to see is
part of the Xbox video in the Spotlight.
| | 01:45 | This is what we would call
the store or marketplace.
| | 01:48 | So, we can actually click these
titles if we're interested, get more
| | 01:51 | information, even purchase them.
| | 01:53 | They become downloaded to our library.
| | 01:57 | Where is that library?
| | 01:59 | Let's go down to the bottom, and when you
see the scrollbar, just drag it to the left.
| | 02:03 | Over here, in my videos, you're going
to see the one video file that is in our
| | 02:08 | Exercise Files called RideBy_05.
| | 02:11 | So, it just show up here under my videos
along with any other files we decide to
| | 02:16 | add to the library, whether we move them
like we did, this one, or purchase them
| | 02:22 | from the marketplace.
| | 02:23 | As we move back to the right now using
our scrollbar at the bottom, you can see
| | 02:27 | there is a Movie Store where we can
get information on additional movies.
| | 02:32 | There's also a television
store for television episodes.
| | 02:35 | And as we move all the way back to the
left-hand side and right-click anywhere,
| | 02:42 | you'll see in the App Bar that we have
the ability to open files from here as
| | 02:46 | well in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 02:49 | You'll see this if you're working with
the RTM Enterprise version like I am.
| | 02:53 | Other versions of Windows 8 may not
include an Open button, so you just open
| | 02:57 | videos directly from their
locations in File Explorer.
| | 03:00 | Either way, they don't
get added to your library.
| | 03:04 | Anything that shows up under my videos
and we'll just click anywhere in an empty
| | 03:07 | space to close up the App Bar,
clicking it is automatically going to play it.
| | 03:12 | Now temporarily, you'll see a Pause
button and some information that will
| | 03:16 | disappear, and then all you have to do is
move your mouse to get that Pause button back.
| | 03:21 | Let's see what I'm talking about.
| | 03:23 | We'll click RideBy_05.
| | 03:27 | (video playing)
| | 03:35 | So, we just move the mouse, the Pause
button reappears, and we can click it.
| | 03:40 | Again, if we don't move the mouse,
all of that information disappears.
| | 03:43 | Just move your mouse to get it back.
| | 03:45 | So you'll see the timeline, you'll see
the marker on the timeline, you'll also
| | 03:50 | see the name of the file, and more
importantly, you'll see the Back button to go
| | 03:54 | back if you're done viewing this.
| | 03:56 | So, we'll hit the Back button.
| | 03:58 | And again, if we wanted to, we could
right-click, open files from here,
| | 04:03 | the current movie that we started watching,
we can also repeat it from here, play
| | 04:08 | it from the App Bar.
| | 04:10 | If you have multiple videos in your
library, you can move between them using
| | 04:14 | the Next and Previous buttons, and you can also
play it to your Xbox console if it's connected.
| | 04:20 | So with all these options from the App
Bar, we'll just click anywhere in the
| | 04:24 | background here to close that up, and
that's a quick look at the Video App.
| | 04:29 | To close this up, we'll just
move to the top of our screen.
| | 04:32 | When we see the hand appear, click and
drag straight down to the bottom of your
| | 04:35 | screen, release closes up the app
and takes us back to our start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locating places with Maps| 00:00 | When you need to find a location,
maybe get directions somewhere, most people
| | 00:04 | typically go to Internet Explorer or
their default browser, go to Google Maps,
| | 00:09 | and off they go.
| | 00:11 | Well, there is something
similar here built into Windows 8.
| | 00:14 | It's called the Maps App.
| | 00:15 | It uses Bing technology, and
that's what we're going to look at now.
| | 00:19 | So here on the start screen, by default,
the Maps tile does appear, and we can
| | 00:23 | click it right from there.
| | 00:26 | Now, there are some cool features that
are built into this including what you
| | 00:29 | see right here the very first time you
go to use maps, 'Do you want to turn on
| | 00:34 | location services?' and this will
just allow the application to know your
| | 00:39 | location, and that will help when I'm
trying to, for example, get directions from
| | 00:43 | somewhere to somewhere.
| | 00:45 | So, by clicking Allow, we turn that on,
and we can turn this off at any time.
| | 00:49 | It will just take a moment for
this app to find your location.
| | 00:53 | You can see what's happened here on this map,
a little diamond has appeared near Ottawa.
| | 00:58 | So, that is my location.
| | 01:00 | You may be seeing that diamond somewhere else.
| | 01:03 | So, we're looking at a default
map, a default view. What next?
| | 01:07 | Well, as we move the mouse around, you
can see we do have something over here on
| | 01:12 | the left-hand side, plus and minus
buttons for zooming in and zooming out.
| | 01:16 | In some versions of Windows 8, you
won't see these buttons, but you can use the
| | 01:19 | keyboard shortcuts instead, Ctrl and
the Plus Sign for zooming in and Ctrl and
| | 01:24 | the Minus Sign for zooming out.
| | 01:26 | In fact, just try plus and minus keys alone
on the numeric keypad for the same result.
| | 01:32 | So let's give the Plus Sign a couple of clicks.
| | 01:34 | We zoom in a little further, and now we can
just go to the map itself, click and drag it.
| | 01:40 | Of course on a tablet or a
smartphone, you can do the same thing.
| | 01:44 | Just swipe it around.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to move this so I get
closer to my actual location which is
| | 01:50 | Ottawa, Ontario in Canada.
| | 01:53 | Let's right click now because there is
a whole lot more we can do with this.
| | 01:57 | We will right-click and
take a look at the App Bar.
| | 02:00 | Down at the bottom, we can
change the map style if we wanted to.
| | 02:03 | Click Map Style, and you will see a
checkmark next to the default view, Road View.
| | 02:07 | If you want an aerial view where you
can actually see terrain and buildings
| | 02:11 | et cetera, click Aerial View.
| | 02:13 | It's like a Satellite View in Google Maps.
| | 02:16 | We can continue to zoom in and out.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to use Ctrl and the Plus
Sign now to zoom in a little bit more.
| | 02:22 | You can see some of the structures are
becoming visible, some of the terrain, for
| | 02:27 | example, and we continue to
see some of the roadways as well.
| | 02:32 | So, we get an idea how this is laid out.
| | 02:35 | So, very interesting stuff!
| | 02:36 | What about directions?
| | 02:38 | Well, let's right-click again and down
at the bottom on the App Bar in the very
| | 02:42 | far right-hand corner is
where you will see directions.
| | 02:46 | All we have is an A and a B field.
| | 02:48 | So, where are we going to
and where are we coming from?
| | 02:51 | Cursor is flashing in the From field.
| | 02:53 | So let's just type in Ottawa.
| | 02:56 | You can type in any location you like.
| | 02:58 | It can be your location or some other location.
| | 03:01 | Let's say I want do a
little cross-border shopping.
| | 03:04 | So I'm going to type in Syracuse.
| | 03:07 | We'll see if that works.
| | 03:08 | I have not added any
provinces, states, et cetera.
| | 03:11 | Clicking the Go button or Get
Directions button, the right arrow is going to
| | 03:15 | take me right to, look at
that, Ottawa down to Syracuse.
| | 03:20 | What else happens is
across the top of the screen.
| | 03:22 | You can see the total length
of my route is over 195 miles.
| | 03:27 | It's over 3 hours to get there.
| | 03:30 | You can see it's broken up into chunks.
| | 03:32 | What's really cool about these
chunks is we can scroll across them.
| | 03:36 | If we want to zoom in to any one of these
segments, all we have to do is click it.
| | 03:41 | And you're zoomed right into that segment.
| | 03:43 | Notice also your route is
highlighted by default in blue.
| | 03:48 | Let's take a look at the next segment.
| | 03:51 | You can see it zooms you out and back
in to that segment. Try another area.
| | 03:56 | And that's a cool view.
| | 03:58 | Now, at any time, we can just go back
into our map, click there, and then try
| | 04:03 | using your wheel mouse if you have one.
| | 04:06 | By scrolling the wheel forward or up,
you're actually zooming out.
| | 04:11 | Scroll that wheel back, and you're zooming in.
| | 04:15 | So, you have Ctrl+Plus, Ctrl+Minus, you
have your Zoom In and Out buttons here
| | 04:19 | as well as your wheel mouse.
| | 04:21 | Here is something I really
like. Let's right-click.
| | 04:24 | Go down to the bottom here,
and click Show Traffic.
| | 04:28 | By doing this, you're actually going
to see color coding representing the
| | 04:32 | traffic at the time that
you're looking at the map.
| | 04:35 | So, if you were on your smartphone let's
say, and you were traveling taking this
| | 04:39 | route to your location, you can get an
idea of what kind of traffic is going on.
| | 04:44 | So anything in green for
example means smooth sailing.
| | 04:47 | We can move this map around.
| | 04:49 | Anything in yellow means it could slow down.
| | 04:52 | Anything that you see in red is
definitely going to be an issue, and you can see
| | 04:57 | as we get closer to Syracuse here, we
do have some red sections where we could
| | 05:01 | run into some traffic issues.
| | 05:02 | Let's right-click again.
| | 05:04 | We will go back down.
| | 05:06 | This time, go to the left-hand
side on the App Bar to clear the map.
| | 05:10 | This is going to clear your directions, it's
going to clear the segments across the top.
| | 05:14 | We will continue to see traffic
though on any roadway on any map.
| | 05:18 | So, whether we're zoomed in or out,
we're going to be able to see that as long
| | 05:23 | as it's still turned on.
| | 05:24 | If you don't want it, just right click,
go back to Show Traffic to click it
| | 05:28 | again and turn it off. Zoom back out.
| | 05:32 | If you get lost in the map, right click,
go back down to the App Bar, click My
| | 05:36 | Location, and you will be
brought right back home.
| | 05:39 | So, you can see my location is on the
outskirts of Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.
| | 05:45 | And as I zoom out, I get a
clearer picture of exactly where I am.
| | 05:50 | So, that's a handy little feature
called maps built right into Windows 8.
| | 05:54 | Think about using this on a tablet
or maybe your smartphone while you're
| | 05:58 | travelling, a very useful feature that
can come in handy if you need to find a
| | 06:02 | location or even get
directions to that location.
| | 06:05 | Let's close it up like we do any other app.
| | 06:07 | We will just go to the very top, when
we see the hand, click, drag it down to
| | 06:12 | the bottom, and release.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Additional Windows AccessoriesTyping text with Notepad and WordPad| 00:00 | Sometimes when you need to create
text documents such as simple notes, you
| | 00:04 | don't need the full power of a word processing
application like Microsoft Word for example.
| | 00:09 | There are a couple of accessories you
may already be familiar with from previous
| | 00:12 | versions of Windows still available
to you here in Windows 8.
| | 00:16 | We're going to take a look at them now.
| | 00:18 | By default, looking at your start screen,
you won't find any tiles for accessing
| | 00:22 | text document creation type accessories.
| | 00:26 | So, we need to right click in the
background, go down to the bottom right corner
| | 00:30 | on the App Bar, and click All Apps.
| | 00:32 | From here, again looking at the additional
apps available to us, the Windows 8
| | 00:36 | apps, there is nothing here
for creating text documents.
| | 00:39 | We need to go to the old Windows accessories
over here on the right-hand side
| | 00:43 | and we're going to start
with one called Notepad.
| | 00:46 | Give that a click, and it
opens up a new blank document.
| | 00:49 | It's untitled and it's sitting there
waiting for you to start typing in text.
| | 00:53 | This is the old Notepad you're accustomed
to in previous versions of Windows.
| | 00:58 | So, for example, if we had a
to-do list, we could type that in.
| | 01:02 | You might see a different default font
size, and style than me, but that's all
| | 01:07 | something we can change.
| | 01:08 | We will talk about that in a moment.
| | 01:10 | Let's put in some items on our to-do list.
| | 01:12 | For example 'Finish budget spreadsheet,'
how about 'Update training calendar,'
| | 01:26 | 'Notify customers of new update.'
| | 01:31 | You can add whatever you like
just to have a few items in here.
| | 01:34 | Now we're going to format this and
take a look at what Notepad has to offer.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to click and drag from
the end all the way up to the top,
| | 01:42 | so everything is selected, and click format.
| | 01:43 | Now, from here, there is not a
whole lot on the Format menu.
| | 01:46 | We have Word Wrap for wrapping words
around the default margins that are set
| | 01:50 | for us here in Notepad.
| | 01:51 | We will take a look at it momentarily,
but the only other option for changing
| | 01:55 | the appearance of our text is Font,
and this allows us to do a few things.
| | 02:00 | We can change the Font Family.
| | 02:01 | So, for example, if we want to go down
to Calibri, and maybe under Font Style,
| | 02:06 | change it from regular to something
else, like for example, Bold or Light.
| | 02:12 | We can also change the size.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to bump this up to 16,
and I'm going to click OK.
| | 02:17 | So everything that was highlighted
or selected has been changed.
| | 02:20 | You can click to deselect.
| | 02:22 | Let's go up here to To-Do List, select
it, and go back to Format, down to Font,
| | 02:27 | and we'll make that stand out.
| | 02:29 | We'll make it bold, and maybe
change the size to 20, and click OK.
| | 02:34 | You can see what happens.
| | 02:35 | Even though we had the title
selected, everything is updated.
| | 02:39 | This is just really for simple note taking
where you don't need to do a lot of formatting.
| | 02:43 | Let's go to the File menu for a second,
click File, and go down to Page Setup to
| | 02:47 | look at the default settings.
| | 02:49 | You can see it's Letter, you can also
see the Orientation is Portrait, and
| | 02:53 | then we have Margins.
| | 02:54 | Mine are at three-quarters of an inch
on the left and right and the top and
| | 02:57 | bottom I changed in a previous document.
| | 03:00 | So they're showing up here
in my new document as well.
| | 03:02 | You probably see 1 inch if it's your first time.
| | 03:05 | I'm going to change that back to 1 inch
on the top, click-and-drag over the
| | 03:08 | bottom figure and type 1 in there.
| | 03:10 | You will also notice some header codes
and footer codes that are going to be
| | 03:15 | used for showing page
numbering et cetera. So we'll click OK.
| | 03:18 | So, those are our settings.
| | 03:20 | Anything that we have change needs to be saved.
| | 03:22 | And again, from the File Menu, notice,
we don't have a ribbon, we don't have any
| | 03:26 | buttons, we have to go to the Menu Bar.
| | 03:28 | And from here, we can go to Save or Save As.
| | 03:31 | And because it's our first time, using
Ctrl+S or selecting Save would be the
| | 03:36 | same as choosing Save As.
| | 03:37 | The Save As window opens up and we
can choose where we're going to save it.
| | 03:41 | Let's choose the Desktop.
| | 03:42 | You will notice that the file name
needs to be entered, and the extension is
| | 03:47 | going to be TXT, a text document.
| | 03:50 | So let's just type in ToDo,
leave the Type as Text Document.
| | 03:54 | If I click the dropdown, you
can see that's our only option.
| | 03:58 | So, we will click Save.
| | 03:59 | Now, our document has been saved,
and it will show up on the desktop.
| | 04:03 | If you need to do a little
bit more, you need more power,
| | 04:06 | you don't need a full word processing
application, but you want to be able to do
| | 04:10 | some more formatting.
| | 04:11 | You might consider another
accessory which is the WordPad.
| | 04:14 | So, this time, we will hit our Windows key on
the keyboard to go back to the start screen.
| | 04:19 | We'll right-click in the background
anywhere, click All Apps from the App Bar,
| | 04:23 | and look for WordPad.
| | 04:26 | This is a beefed up Notepad.
| | 04:28 | And in fact, it almost looks
like a word processing application.
| | 04:32 | Notice at the top, we have a Quick
Access Toolbar with Save, Undo, and Redo.
| | 04:36 | You can also add buttons like I did,
the Open button by clicking the dropdown
| | 04:40 | and selecting items that
are not checked to add them.
| | 04:43 | Maybe for example Print Preview
would be a good one to have up there.
| | 04:46 | Also, we have just below that, tabs for
our ribbon and including a File Tab here,
| | 04:51 | and when we click File, you
will notice New, Open, and Saving.
| | 04:54 | Go down to Save As though and just take
a look at some of the additional formats
| | 04:58 | you can save, too, including
XML documents, RTF or Rich Text.
| | 05:03 | There is our plain TXT document type.
| | 05:06 | But, you do have more options to
the format you're going to save to.
| | 05:10 | We also have some printing options.
| | 05:12 | There is Page Setup right from the File Tab
where we can look at the defaults for this.
| | 05:16 | Again, the Size is Letter, Portrait.
| | 05:19 | You're going to see left and right
margins defaulted to 1.25, 1 at the top and
| | 05:24 | the bottom, and you can see
Print Page Numbers is selected.
| | 05:28 | We don't actually see the codes for page
headers or footers, we just see a checkbox.
| | 05:32 | So let's leave it as is by clicking
Cancel, and again, we would start typing.
| | 05:37 | But, look at the Home Tab here.
| | 05:38 | We have a number of options for
changing our font right from here.
| | 05:42 | We can change the font type.
| | 05:44 | Let's go back to Arial for
example, and bump it up to 12.
| | 05:47 | We could also change the appearance,
Bold, Italic, Underline;
| | 05:51 | we can change font color, we can change
Font Alignment which is defaulted to Left.
| | 05:56 | If we go to center for example, and type in
Title and press Enter a couple of times,
| | 06:01 | everything we type will be centered
unless we go back to left-aligned.
| | 06:06 | We can insert things like pictures.
| | 06:08 | So if you have the images that you want
to insert or maybe images you want to
| | 06:12 | draw using the Paint Program, we're going to
be looking at Paint momentarily in this chapter.
| | 06:17 | So we will leave that for later.
| | 06:19 | But, you can actually insert
drawings right into your document here.
| | 06:21 | There is a keyboard shortcut, Ctrl+D. You want
the date and time in there, give it a click.
| | 06:26 | Choose your format, and click OK,
| | 06:29 | inserts the date for you;
| | 06:31 | we will hit Enter a couple of times.
| | 06:33 | Notice also you have some additional
functionality for inserting objects using
| | 06:37 | Find and Replace, and some other
editing options like Selecting.
| | 06:41 | Under View, we can also change some of
the View options like our zoom level.
| | 06:45 | Let's zoom out for example to see more
of the page and the layout, or go right
| | 06:50 | back to 100% by clicking in.
| | 06:52 | What's showing up on your screen?
The ruler across the top.
| | 06:55 | Don't like it, turn it off;
| | 06:57 | same thing for the Status Bar across
the bottom where you can also change the
| | 07:01 | zoom level if you want to zoom in or
out by clicking-and-dragging the slider.
| | 07:07 | You also have the measurement units
which are defaulted to Inches, but if you're
| | 07:11 | in a metric society, you might choose
Centimeters, or working with graphics,
| | 07:15 | you might choose Points for example.
| | 07:17 | Just leave it at Inches.
| | 07:19 | So again, this is
something we would want to save.
| | 07:21 | There is a Save button right
on the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 07:24 | We could choose where we're going to save it to.
| | 07:27 | Let's go to the desktop.
| | 07:28 | Notice the Save As type default is not
TXT like Notepad, but RTF, Rich Text,
| | 07:34 | which means we have more formatting
capabilities for our characters.
| | 07:38 | Click the dropdown though if you
want to choose from one of those other
| | 07:41 | options we saw earlier.
| | 07:42 | I'm going to leave it at RTF.
| | 07:45 | I'm going to click here and type in Proposal.
| | 07:51 | When I click Save, it's been saved
now to the location of my choosing.
| | 07:55 | I can continue working on this document.
| | 07:57 | Of course, when we're done, we can click
the Close button in the top-right corner.
| | 08:00 | We will do the same for Notepad and press
our Windows key to return to the start screen.
| | 08:06 | That's a couple of accessories that
allow us to create text documents here
| | 08:11 | in Windows 8, still available to you from
previous versions of Microsoft Windows.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating graphics with Paint| 00:00 | If you need to create simple graphics,
and I stress 'simple', there is a
| | 00:04 | built-in accessory here in Windows 8
that you maybe familiar with, again from
| | 00:08 | previous versions of Windows, it's
the Paint Accessory, and we're going to
| | 00:12 | take a look at it now.
| | 00:14 | I happen to have a tile right here on my
start screen, but if you don't, no problem.
| | 00:18 | Just right click the background,
click all apps, and we'll move over to
| | 00:22 | the right-hand side here where we see all
of the Windows accessories including Paint.
| | 00:27 | So we'll give it a click.
| | 00:28 | As I mentioned earlier, this is
for creating very simple graphics.
| | 00:31 | It's not a very powerful
graphic editing program.
| | 00:35 | However, it has come a long way over
the years in previous versions of Windows.
| | 00:41 | So, let's take a look at what we have.
| | 00:42 | First of all, across the top of the
screen, we have our Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 00:46 | So if you like, you can customize that
by clicking the dropdown and picking and
| | 00:50 | choosing what's going to show
up on your Quick Access toolbar.
| | 00:53 | I like the Open button there.
| | 00:54 | Also, you have a File menu.
| | 00:56 | Clicking that allows you to
access file-related commands.
| | 00:59 | For example, if you wanted to create new
files, Ctrl+N being the shortcut, Open, Save.
| | 01:06 | And let's move down to Save As to take
a peek at the various formats you can
| | 01:10 | save your drawings to.
| | 01:11 | Notice PNG, JPEG, you can also save to
BMP files or GIF picture files which are
| | 01:19 | a little bit lower in quality,
but take up less space.
| | 01:23 | So there's a little description for each.
| | 01:25 | And again we can also use Paint to edit
existing graphic images of these formats.
| | 01:30 | So, if you have for example photos in
the JPEG format, you could open them up
| | 01:35 | here in Paint, and do some simple editing.
| | 01:38 | Let's move forward to the left hand side.
| | 01:40 | There's an option for Printing
and you can see the Print options.
| | 01:43 | We can also send off our drawings via
email right from here, and let's check out
| | 01:48 | the properties by clicking
Properties here on the File Tab.
| | 01:51 | Notice our image properties for our
current file right now, the units being used
| | 01:56 | as inches and the color.
| | 01:58 | We can create black and white images
here or we can leave color selected.
| | 02:03 | That is our default.
| | 02:04 | Notice that the default
layout is actually Landscape.
| | 02:08 | In other words, 11 inches by 8.5 in height,
and that's what we're looking at on
| | 02:13 | screen in the background.
| | 02:14 | So, let's click Cancel here.
| | 02:16 | Let's say we wanted to be
able to see the whole page.
| | 02:19 | Well, one thing we might want
to do is change the zoom level.
| | 02:22 | We can do that from the
View Tab by clicking View.
| | 02:25 | You'll see a Zoom In, a Zoom Out.
| | 02:27 | Clicking Zoom Out takes us from 100% to 50%.
| | 02:30 | How do we know that?
| | 02:31 | Take a look at the bottom
right-hand corner of your screen.
| | 02:33 | There's also a slider here.
| | 02:35 | On the Status Bar, we can click and drag
this to the right and you'll notice the
| | 02:39 | next stop is 100%, and then we keep
going in increments of 100 from there.
| | 02:44 | As we move back, we go down to 50, 25.
| | 02:47 | Let's leave it at 50, so we can see
the entire canvas as we continue to work.
| | 02:52 | Other options from the View Tab include rulers.
| | 02:55 | If you want to be precise with your
measurements, you'll have a ruler across the
| | 02:58 | top and down the left-hand side.
| | 03:00 | We can add grid lines again for drawing,
and turn those off when we're done.
| | 03:04 | And the Status Bar does appear across
the bottom of your screen by default.
| | 03:07 | Let's go back to Home now
because here's where we find our tools.
| | 03:11 | For example, as we move over to the
Tools section, you'll see a pencil.
| | 03:15 | We'll also see a paint can which is
what we use to fill up sections with color.
| | 03:21 | We can add text as well, erase.
| | 03:24 | There's an Eyedropper Tool for picking
colors from other items that you might
| | 03:28 | want to use in new items for example.
| | 03:31 | We also have this magnifier that
allows us to magnify a part of the
| | 03:35 | picture we're working on.
| | 03:36 | There are number of different
brushes to choose from.
| | 03:38 | So, for example, if you use the pencil,
what's that stroke going to look like
| | 03:43 | and you can see there is water color
as you hover over these, crayon etcetera;
| | 03:46 | go exploring through these to see the
different brushes you have at your disposal.
| | 03:51 | Also, we have a number of shapes, and there
is a dropdown here so you can see them all.
| | 03:55 | These are pre-drawn shapes
that you can pick from.
| | 03:58 | Just click and drag to draw the shape
and you're ready to work with that
| | 04:03 | shape once it's drawn.
| | 04:04 | You'll notice we also have options for
outline, and fill that we'll be able to
| | 04:08 | access including the stroke size, the
colors for the fill, and for the outline
| | 04:14 | are accessible from our color palette.
| | 04:17 | We can even edit colors from here.
| | 04:18 | So, let's get to work with our simple drawing.
| | 04:21 | We're going to start with this line shape
which is actually called Curve. Give it a click.
| | 04:26 | We'll go as far left as
we can near the top here.
| | 04:29 | You know you're off the canvass when
your mouse pointer changes from the
| | 04:32 | crosshair to the arrow.
| | 04:34 | So you want to just move right to the edge.
| | 04:36 | When it turns into the crosshair,
click and drag across to the other side.
| | 04:40 | It doesn't matter if it's level.
| | 04:41 | Just go all the way across, and let go.
| | 04:43 | Because this is a curve and currently
it's straight, it means we need to tug on
| | 04:47 | it to create that curve.
| | 04:49 | Let's just pull it down like so and release.
| | 04:51 | So now we've drawn our curved shape,
let's go to the straight line here.
| | 04:55 | Click the Line Tool in the Shape section,
and let's just draw a couple of
| | 04:59 | straight lines from the middle of our
curve here off to the corners, click.
| | 05:05 | We'll go back up here.
| | 05:06 | When we see the crosshair, click and drag,
and release, and now we have some sections.
| | 05:13 | We're going to work with the Fill Tool
now to fill in those sections with color.
| | 05:17 | So we'll go up to the paint can.
| | 05:19 | Over here, we'll choose the color
that's going to be used, Color 1.
| | 05:23 | I'm going to go with a dark blue to begin.
| | 05:26 | I'm going to click in this top area.
| | 05:29 | Notice it fills it in with blue.
| | 05:31 | Let's change our color now to Green.
| | 05:34 | Click the Green color swatch,
click in the left, click on the right.
| | 05:39 | Now, we'll go to a nice light gray, and click
right down the middle of our road. You guessed it.
| | 05:46 | Let's try some other shapes now.
| | 05:48 | Let's go up to the oval for example.
| | 05:50 | I will click the oval.
| | 05:52 | We'll change our color to White.
| | 05:54 | If you go to Color 2, it too should be White.
| | 05:56 | That's the outline.
| | 05:58 | And all we're going to do
is come up here into the sky.
| | 06:01 | We'll click and drag to draw an oval.
| | 06:04 | Notice that if the inside is not filled,
that's because we haven't chosen our
| | 06:09 | Fill option correctly.
| | 06:11 | So, let's go to the Fill dropdown
and you can see No Fill is the default
| | 06:15 | and choose solid color.
| | 06:16 | Look at the preview over there in your drawing.
| | 06:18 | That's what we want, solid
color, so we'll click it.
| | 06:22 | Let's draw some more now on top of
that and maybe one more at the top, size
| | 06:28 | that, one more tiny one, looks good.
| | 06:33 | Let's draw another smaller one
over here on the right-hand side.
| | 06:39 | There we go, a couple of clouds.
| | 06:40 | I think I might change
the road to a darker gray.
| | 06:43 | So let's go up to our Color 1 swatch,
choose the darker gray, go to the Fill Tool.
| | 06:50 | This is what we want to do, fill in
the road area with a darker gray, because
| | 06:55 | what we're going to do next is draw
some straight lines down the middle.
| | 06:59 | So, we can choose the size of those lines.
| | 07:02 | You can see from thin all the way to thick.
| | 07:04 | Start with a thin one to begin,
change the color to white.
| | 07:10 | And let's just go away up here at the top.
| | 07:12 | Click and drag straight down.
| | 07:15 | We have our first white line.
| | 07:18 | I'll click and drag, draw
something a little bit longer.
| | 07:22 | Let's go to a different size now just
so you get the idea. Click and drag.
| | 07:31 | Keep it as straight as possible.
| | 07:33 | Now, if you want to, you can hold
down the Shift key to make sure it
| | 07:36 | stays perfectly straight. All right.
| | 07:39 | So those are some of the options
for creating a simple drawing.
| | 07:42 | You could continue working with some of
the other tools, for example, I'm not so
| | 07:46 | sure what happened here with my cloud.
| | 07:48 | Let's go to the eraser, and let's see
what happens if we try to start erasing this.
| | 07:53 | You can see the background color is white.
| | 07:56 | Well, let's change our color too here to
that dark blue, and start erasing our cloud.
| | 08:02 | Notice that the background
becomes that nice blue. Very good.
| | 08:07 | So, I'll just take out the cloud or
parts of it because we're going to draw
| | 08:14 | right over that using a different
tool, a different brush that is.
| | 08:18 | Let's go to the brush, and let's go over here
to this one on the far right which is airbrush.
| | 08:24 | Give it a click, and now let's go back
to our colors and make sure they're both
| | 08:28 | selected as white and start spraying.
| | 08:31 | This might give us a
better effect for our cloud.
| | 08:34 | All you're doing is holding down your
mouse button, and you're spraying, and you
| | 08:42 | can see that's a more realistic
looking cloud so far than our first one.
| | 08:47 | Of course, when you're ready to save,
it's just a matter of clicking the Save
| | 08:51 | button, or going to File, and choosing
Save, or Save As the very first time.
| | 08:56 | It doesn't matter if you use Ctrl+S on
the keyboard Save, or Save As, you're
| | 09:00 | going to see the Save As window,
where you get to choose the location.
| | 09:04 | Let's go to our desktop.
| | 09:07 | Let's click where it says
Filename, and type in Landscape.
| | 09:10 | You'll see the default Save Type is PNG,
but we can choose from those other options.
| | 09:17 | For example, maybe GIF format which is
going to take up less space on our computer.
| | 09:22 | It will be lower resolution,
but that's okay for our purposes.
| | 09:25 | Select that and click Save.
| | 09:29 | Notice that because we did choose a
lower quality format, the color might be
| | 09:33 | reduced if you save this picture.
| | 09:35 | Do we want to continue?
| | 09:36 | We'll click OK, and it has been saved.
| | 09:39 | You might see on your own screen that the
quality and the resolution has gone down.
| | 09:44 | Let's close up Paint.
| | 09:45 | That's a quick intro to the Paint accessory.
| | 09:48 | There it is on our desktop.
| | 09:49 | So of course when we go to double-click
that, it's going to be opened up with
| | 09:53 | our default program, in my case, the Paint
program where I can make additional edits.
| | 09:57 | Keep in mind you can open up your
photos in Paint as well if you want to do
| | 10:01 | some minor editing.
| | 10:02 | It's not really what we would consider,
a full fledged graphics application,
| | 10:06 | but it is an accessory
available to you here in Windows 8.
| | 10:09 | Let's flip back to our start screen by
tapping the Windows key on the keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Performing simple and advanced calculations with the Calculator| 00:00 | Have you ever been fumbling around
for a calculator, needed to do a quick
| | 00:03 | calculation and couldn't find one?
| | 00:05 | Well, here in Windows 8, we have the
same calculator we've grown accustomed to
| | 00:09 | in previous versions of Windows.
| | 00:11 | It came with the original Windows XP.
| | 00:14 | We still have it here in Windows 8.
| | 00:15 | We're going to take a look at it because
there are a few cool things we can do with it.
| | 00:20 | So let's right click anywhere in the background.
| | 00:22 | It's not one of the metro tiles you're
going to see here on the start screen.
| | 00:26 | So let's go down to the App Bar
after right clicking and click All Apps.
| | 00:30 | It is a Windows accessory, so you
need to go over to the right-half of your
| | 00:34 | screen and find the Calculator.
| | 00:35 | Give it a click, and you'll probably
see the default view which I'm looking at
| | 00:39 | right now if it's your first time.
| | 00:41 | If you've already used the calculator
and changed up some of the settings,
| | 00:44 | you'll see the calculator the way
you left it the last time you used it.
| | 00:48 | But here, if we go to the View menu,
and take a look, this is the Standard view
| | 00:52 | using the Basic option.
| | 00:53 | Notice there are keyboard
shortcuts for every one of these.
| | 00:56 | So let's just leave it as is for
right now, and let's say we needed to do
| | 01:00 | that quick calculation. Okay.
| | 01:02 | I just bought four tickets to Bruce Springsteen,
and some people owe me some money.
| | 01:07 | So I need to figure that out.
| | 01:08 | The total for the four tickets $433.68.
| | 01:16 | I need to divide that by 4, divided by,
we can use the same keys on the keyboard;
| | 01:21 | 4, equals, and there's the answer.
| | 01:25 | Each person owes me $108.42. Just like that.
| | 01:29 | Let's clear all of that out.
| | 01:31 | Click the Clear button, and let's
change our view for a second here.
| | 01:34 | Let's go to View, in Scientific.
| | 01:36 | For those who need a scientific
calculator, you can see we have all of
| | 01:39 | these extra buttons;
| | 01:41 | into calculus, sines, cosines
et cetera, you got it all right here.
| | 01:45 | Click View, and go down to Programmer.
| | 01:48 | Programmers will have options for things
like let's say we type in the number 22.
| | 01:51 | We're wondering what that is in binary.
| | 01:55 | Click Binary, and you can
see the answer right there.
| | 01:58 | Simple enough, we'll go back to
View and change this to Statistics.
| | 02:03 | Also, a calculator for calculating
statistics and you'll see a number of the
| | 02:07 | notation buttons available to
you down the right-hand side.
| | 02:11 | Let's go to View now, and we'll go back
to Standard, but click the View dropdown
| | 02:17 | and choose Unit Conversion. I like this.
| | 02:21 | Sometimes I'm wondering what the
temperature is in Fahrenheit let's say?
| | 02:24 | I'm here in Ottawa, Canada.
| | 02:26 | Today, we're looking at a temperature, so
I'll click the dropdown and choose that.
| | 02:30 | A high of 15 degrees Celsius, I
wonder what that is in Fahrenheit.
| | 02:35 | So down at the bottom, we'll click
the dropdown, change it to Degrees
| | 02:38 | Fahrenheit, and sure enough, we're
looking a high 59 today, not bad for
| | 02:42 | the middle of October.
| | 02:44 | Let's go back to View now and try another one;
| | 02:46 | a Date Calculation. I like that.
| | 02:48 | With date calculations, you can
figure out how many days between two
| | 02:52 | different dates for example.
| | 02:54 | So, 'Calculate the difference
between two dates' is the default.
| | 02:56 | You can also add or subtract days
to a specified date you would select.
| | 03:00 | Let's leave it at this.
| | 03:02 | I'll leave the current date
selected, you can do the same.
| | 03:05 | Let's say we want to go to the holiday
season, and select a date there, find out
| | 03:10 | how many days we have till then.
| | 03:12 | All we have to do is click Calculate;
| | 03:14 | 2 months, 2 weeks, 2 days equals to 77 days.
| | 03:18 | I wonder how many shopping days that means.
| | 03:20 | So that's a quick look at the Calculator.
| | 03:22 | Let's go back to View>Basic, standard,
close it up, press the Windows key on
| | 03:28 | your keyboard to go back to the
start screen and now you know all of the
| | 03:32 | different things you can do with
the Calculator here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking screenshots with the Snipping tool| 00:00 | One of my all time favorite accessories
in Windows, first appeared in Windows 7,
| | 00:04 | is the Snipping Tool.
| | 00:06 | It allows you to capture your screen.
| | 00:08 | It could be the entire screen, a window
in that screen, or even a portion thereof.
| | 00:12 | And I'm surprised how many people didn't
even realize this existed back in Windows 7.
| | 00:16 | We're going to take a
look at it here in Windows 8.
| | 00:19 | We'll start by going to the desktop.
| | 00:21 | So click the Desktop tile on your start screen.
| | 00:23 | You can go down to the bottom on your
taskbar, and launch Internet Explorer,
| | 00:28 | and go to lynda.com.
| | 00:30 | Next, we're going to go to New Releases.
| | 00:33 | Let's say we're interested
in the new business releases.
| | 00:37 | We see a list of items here and we
want to share this with somebody.
| | 00:40 | We can capture a portion of the screen
for example, and email it off to them
| | 00:45 | maybe as an attachment or right in the email.
| | 00:47 | Let's look at some of the
options now with the Snipping Tool.
| | 00:50 | Press your Windows key on the
keyboard to go back to the start screen.
| | 00:53 | It's not one of the tiles you'll see
here by default, but if it is a tool you're
| | 00:56 | going to use often, why not add it here?
| | 00:59 | I'm going to do that right now by
right-clicking in the background.
| | 01:02 | Now, from the App Bar, click All Apps.
| | 01:04 | And in the Windows Accessory section,
you'll find the Snipping Tool.
| | 01:08 | Now, before I click it, I'm going to
right-click it to check it off and now
| | 01:12 | from the App Bar at the bottom, I'm
going to go all the way to the bottom-left,
| | 01:16 | and click Pin to Start.
| | 01:17 | Now, it will be on my start screen, so
I don't have to come here to access it.
| | 01:21 | But, since I'm here, I can
click Snipping Tool right now.
| | 01:24 | It does take me back to my old desktop
environment, and you'll see a little
| | 01:28 | window with a New button,
a Cancel button, and Options.
| | 01:32 | Click the dropdown arrow next to New to see
the different options for what you can capture.
| | 01:37 | A Free-form Snip means you'll click
and drag with your mouse to capture any
| | 01:40 | part of the screen using Free-form, or if you
want a perfect rectangle, choose Rectangle Snip.
| | 01:46 | Maybe you want the entire window if
there are many windows open, you can choose
| | 01:50 | the window or capture the full screen.
| | 01:52 | That's everything you see here including
the icons and the background on the desktop.
| | 01:57 | Let's choose Rectangular Snip, the default.
| | 02:00 | Everything gets faded in the background,
and it's just waiting for you to
| | 02:03 | click-and-drag over the
area you want to capture.
| | 02:06 | I want to capture these latest releases.
| | 02:08 | So, I'm going to click and drag from the
top-left to the bottom-right to get the
| | 02:12 | latest six releases here at lynda.com.
| | 02:15 | When you let go, a new window opens up for
Snipping Tool where you'll see your capture.
| | 02:21 | You can go to a new one if you want to
try again, maybe didn't get it right.
| | 02:25 | You could save this, copy it to your
clipboard, and paste it in something else.
| | 02:30 | A typical scenario might be you're looking
at a software program in different screens,
| | 02:34 | and you want to capture the screen,
maybe to add it as a graphic
| | 02:38 | to learning materials you're
creating in Microsoft Word for example.
| | 02:42 | We can also email this.
| | 02:44 | Click the dropdown. Email it.
| | 02:45 | It will be part of your email message, or
email it to a recipient as an attachment.
| | 02:50 | Then, we have some pen options here.
| | 02:52 | So, if you want to mark this up,
choose the color that you want.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to go with Red Pen, and
I'm going to highlight something.
| | 02:59 | I'm going to just point down to this
one here, and that might be of interest
| | 03:04 | to the person I'm about to send this off to.
| | 03:06 | We can highlight areas with a highlighter.
| | 03:08 | Click the Highlighter and click
and drag over the title maybe.
| | 03:12 | There's an Eraser, too, if you want to erase
any or all of the markup that you've added.
| | 03:17 | I think I'll just take out that arrow.
| | 03:22 | All I need is the highlighter. There we go.
| | 03:24 | I'm ready to save this.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to click the Save button and
you'll notice the default name is Capture
| | 03:29 | but we can click in front
of that and add something.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to type in LDCReleases_Capture.
| | 03:37 | You can also choose the file type you're
going to save to, the type of graphic file, PNG.
| | 03:42 | You might see that by default.
| | 03:43 | It could be a GIF file, lower resolution,
but smaller file size; JPEG, better
| | 03:48 | resolution, bigger file size.
| | 03:50 | You also have Single file HTML.
| | 03:52 | I'm going to go to JPEG and you'll
see the date taken and you'll also add
| | 03:57 | tags if you wanted to.
| | 03:58 | This can be added to your Photos
Library for example in Windows 8.
| | 04:02 | So let's click Save.
| | 04:04 | It appears for me down on my desktop.
| | 04:06 | That's the location selected,
and now I have a capture.
| | 04:09 | So I can go on to a new one.
| | 04:11 | Other scenarios might include screenshots
of programs or entire windows that you
| | 04:16 | want to capture, and add to a course
where you might be creating in other programs,
| | 04:20 | copying and pasting, works with the
Copy button and then the Paste
| | 04:24 | button in the application you're working with.
| | 04:27 | So, lots of scenarios where you
might want to capture the screen.
| | 04:30 | When you're done with the
Snipping Tool, just close it up.
| | 04:32 | Close up anything else you
have here on your desktop.
| | 04:35 | Let's press our Windows key to go back
to the start screen, and that's a quick
| | 04:39 | look at one of my favorite tools,
the Snipping Tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. System SettingsViewing your current system specs| 00:00 | As in previous versions of Microsoft
Windows here in Windows 8, you have
| | 00:04 | full access to your system settings, something
we're going to talk about in this chapter.
| | 00:08 | This would mean somewhat of an
administrative role in accessing
| | 00:12 | Administrative Tools.
| | 00:14 | So we're going to start with gathering
information about your computer,
| | 00:18 | how we access basic information, and detailed
information about what you already have
| | 00:22 | before we go in and start
changing some of those settings.
| | 00:26 | So, here from our start screen, you
won't find any tiles that take you directly
| | 00:29 | to that information,
| | 00:31 | typically found under Control Panel, but
there are a number of ways to get there.
| | 00:35 | One option is just to
right-click in the background.
| | 00:37 | When the App Bar appears, go down to
the bottom-right and click All Apps.
| | 00:42 | Now, as we scroll across to the right,
you won't really see anything that will
| | 00:46 | take you directly to the System Information
from here, but you do have access to
| | 00:50 | the Control Panel which will open up
in the old desktop environment,
| | 00:54 | and then you can navigate through the various
sections to that System Information.
| | 00:58 | I want to show you another way though.
| | 01:00 | So, press the Windows key on your
keyboard to go back to the original start screen.
| | 01:05 | One option is to turn on the Administrative
Tools, so you see them here on the start screen.
| | 01:11 | Let's access our Settings.
| | 01:12 | You can go to the top or bottom right-
hand corner, and when you see the charms,
| | 01:17 | just move up to Settings, and give it a click.
| | 01:19 | Now, from here, we'll click Tiles, and
we're going to show our Admin Tools by
| | 01:25 | clicking the slider.
| | 01:26 | When you see Yes, just come over here into
the background of your Start screen and click.
| | 01:31 | It will take a moment, but your Administrative
Tools will now appear on your start screen.
| | 01:36 | You can swipe over if you have a
touch screen or scroll over like I am with
| | 01:40 | the mouse, and you'll see quick
access to a number of different areas
| | 01:43 | including System Information.
| | 01:47 | Now, clicking System Information here
again will take us to our desktop where
| | 01:50 | we're going to see System Information
at the top and then a number of
| | 01:53 | different categories.
| | 01:55 | With the System Summary selected, you're
seeing information about your operating system.
| | 02:00 | And as you scroll down, you'll see lots
of information about the manufacturer,
| | 02:05 | the system directory, lots of
information that is somewhat detailed.
| | 02:10 | Now, we can get basic information as well.
| | 02:13 | Let's just go down to the bottom left-hand
corner now, and when the Start tile
| | 02:17 | appears, we'll right-click.
| | 02:19 | And from here, you'll notice on the shortcut,
again, we have quick access to the
| | 02:23 | Control Panel from here.
| | 02:25 | But, there's also something called System.
| | 02:27 | When we click System here,
we see a different window.
| | 02:31 | In this case, what we're going to see
is basic information about our computer
| | 02:34 | including; there's our operating system.
| | 02:37 | You can see System Ratings and processor.
| | 02:40 | There's our Installed Memory, so
you have an idea of how much memory
| | 02:44 | you're working with, the system type,
and this is often important when
| | 02:47 | installing software.
| | 02:48 | Are you working with a 32-bit
or a 64-bit operating system?
| | 02:52 | As you scroll down, you'll see additional
options including a Change Settings
| | 02:56 | link which allows us to change any of
our settings here that are applicable.
| | 03:00 | For example, if we look at the
computer name, you're going to see your own
| | 03:03 | computer name, and then there
could be a description as well.
| | 03:08 | Well, if there's nothing there, clicking
Change Settings allows you to go in and
| | 03:11 | add a computer description.
| | 03:14 | So I'm going to type in
'lynda.com author computer.'
| | 03:20 | You can type whatever you like, click Apply.
| | 03:22 | It will show up here in the
background on our basic system screen.
| | 03:25 | Click OK to lock it in.
| | 03:27 | Notice you also have access to a
number of other areas under Control Panel
| | 03:31 | like the Device Manager, Remote Settings,
things we're going to be talking
| | 03:35 | about in this chapter.
| | 03:36 | So, when you're done reviewing your System
Information, just close up those windows.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to our start screen now
by pressing the Windows key on the
| | 03:44 | keyboard, and that's how we
gather information about our computer.
| | 03:48 | Now, it's time to move on and start
making changes to some of that information.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling sound device volume settings| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going to focus
our attentions on your audio or sound
| | 00:05 | settings here in Windows 8.
| | 00:07 | We can access certain settings from Windows 8.
| | 00:10 | We can also access other settings
from our old desktop environment.
| | 00:14 | So, we'll look at both,
starting with our start screen here.
| | 00:17 | The options that you have available
at your fingertips are accessible
| | 00:20 | through the settings.
| | 00:21 | So, let's use our Windows keyboard shortcut;
| | 00:23 | that is the Windows key plus I opens
up our Settings Panel on the right,
| | 00:28 | and you'll notice something over
here in the lower-half, a speaker icon
| | 00:32 | with a number below it.
| | 00:33 | Well, the number
represents the volume out of 100%.
| | 00:38 | Click that icon and you can adjust
the volume, and you'll be adjusting the
| | 00:42 | volume for your system.
| | 00:44 | So, drag the slider up.
| | 00:47 | And when you release, you hear
a sample sound, little too loud?
| | 00:50 | Click the speaker icon again, and drag it down.
| | 00:53 | I'm going to go down to 50 exactly.
| | 00:57 | So, that's a good volume for me.
| | 00:59 | And as you can see from here in our
settings, it's really the only audio or
| | 01:03 | sound setting you have access to.
| | 01:05 | So, if you want to get to some of
those other ones, we need to go to our old
| | 01:08 | desktop environment and use the Control Panel.
| | 01:11 | So, we'll just click off to the left
here to collapse the right-hand pane,
| | 01:16 | and to get to our Control Panel, let's go
to Desktop, and from here, let's go down
| | 01:22 | to the bottom-left corner of our screen,
and when we see the windows tile, we'll
| | 01:25 | right-click and select Control Panel from there.
| | 01:29 | It's a nice little shortcut I like to use.
| | 01:32 | Now, from here, you will see a
section labeled Hardware and Sound.
| | 01:35 | We're going to click right on the text,
Hardware and Sound, which opens up that
| | 01:40 | section and displays other subsections.
| | 01:43 | Notice under sound here, we have
subsections like Adjusting System Volume,
| | 01:47 | Changing System Sounds,
and Managing Audio Devices.
| | 01:51 | Let's just click sound and you'll see
some of those sound options over here like
| | 01:56 | Playback, Recording, Sounds, and Communications.
| | 01:59 | We'll get to that momentarily.
| | 02:01 | But, also here in our old desktop
environment down in the bottom right-hand
| | 02:04 | corner when we move down there, and pop
up our taskbar, you'll notice a speaker
| | 02:09 | icon there as well, and you'll see
your current setting, the setting we just
| | 02:13 | chose in our Windows start screen.
| | 02:16 | We can click this speaker icon to see a
similar slider where we can adjust the
| | 02:21 | system volume, but we can
also mute it all together.
| | 02:25 | Notice the speaker icon right below the
slider, will allow us to click and mute
| | 02:30 | our speakers all together.
| | 02:31 | So we're not hearing anything.
| | 02:33 | If you need to eliminate
distractions, it's a great option.
| | 02:37 | When you want to bring your audio back,
go to the same icon and click again.
| | 02:41 | It is a toggle to turn it on.
| | 02:43 | But, we can also access something
called the mixer from here as well.
| | 02:46 | Click the Mixer and another
little window opens up here.
| | 02:49 | The Volume Mixer is going to show you
icons and sections for anything that's
| | 02:55 | running right now that uses audio, like
your speakers and your system sounds.
| | 02:59 | Now, if we had something else running
like Windows Media Player, it would
| | 03:03 | show up here as well.
| | 03:04 | We could adjust the volume separately.
| | 03:06 | But, we do have a master switch
here which is currently set to 50.
| | 03:09 | So, if we want to change the Master Volume,
let's bring it all the way up to 75, let's say.
| | 03:17 | When you let go, you hear that sample sound.
| | 03:19 | And for system sounds maybe we don't want
it all the way up there, we want them at 50.
| | 03:23 | So, we can click that slider down as
we drag all the way to let's go to 50
| | 03:29 | exactly, and leave it there,
and you'll hear a fainter sound.
| | 03:33 | Now, let's say something else is running.
| | 03:34 | We'll go to our Exercise Files.
| | 03:38 | And inside that folder, you'll
find an MP3 file called Easy For You.
| | 03:42 | Just click once to select it.
| | 03:45 | From the open section on the
ribbon, you'll notice clicking Open is
| | 03:48 | actually going to take us back to
our Windows 8 environment, and use the
| | 03:52 | Music App to open this up.
| | 03:54 | Well, we want to be able to access it
from here in our old desktop environment.
| | 03:58 | So click the dropdown and
choose Windows Media Player.
| | 04:02 | If it's your first time using this, you maybe
prompted, and it may show up in the background.
| | 04:07 | Mine is flashing down here, so I'm
going to give it a click, and sure enough,
| | 04:11 | I'm being prompted here for settings.
| | 04:12 | I'm going to use the recommended settings
for now for Media Player and click Finish.
| | 04:16 | You can see now it's actually going to run
(music playing) and launch my music file.
| | 04:24 | I'm just going to click the Pause
button here and leave it running.
| | 04:28 | Now, what we're going to do
is we're going to flip back.
| | 04:30 | So, I'm going to move this down, I'm
going to close up my Exercise Files, and
| | 04:35 | take a look at the Volume
Mixer in the background here.
| | 04:38 | It now has a third section
for our Windows Media Player.
| | 04:42 | I can adjust the volume for it as well.
| | 04:45 | Notice as I go up towards the top
level here of my Master Volume, it starts
| | 04:51 | pushing it up as well.
| | 04:52 | I'm going to leave it down at about 50, and
I'm going to bring my Master Volume back down.
| | 04:58 | Notice as I bring it down,
everything else kind of goes down with it.
| | 05:03 | So, once you found a level that's
suitable to you, you simply leave it like
| | 05:06 | that and notice there are icons below
each one of these, so we can mute any or
| | 05:11 | all of them at once.
| | 05:12 | Maybe I don't want to hear what's going
on with my Windows Media Player right now.
| | 05:16 | So, if I come back to it and play,
you'll notice it has been muted.
| | 05:20 | I'm going to pause it and unmute it.
| | 05:23 | As soon as I close my Windows Media
Player, it's no longer available to me
| | 05:29 | on the Volume Mixer.
| | 05:30 | Let's close that up as well. All right.
| | 05:34 | So, a moment ago, we chose sound here
from our Control Panel and you'll notice
| | 05:38 | there are different sections;
Playback which would mean our speakers;
| | 05:41 | Recording, here's Sounds, these are
system sounds; and we also have something
| | 05:47 | called Communications.
| | 05:48 | So Windows knows if you're using your
computer to communicate, so maybe it's
| | 05:53 | over the phone for example.
| | 05:55 | What's going to happen to
some of the other sounds?
| | 05:57 | Will they be reduced, so that they're not
interrupting a conversation, for example?
| | 06:02 | Will they be muted all together?
| | 06:04 | That's totally up to you.
| | 06:05 | Let's leave it at reduced to 80%. All right.
| | 06:10 | Let's go back now to playback and
take a look at some of these settings.
| | 06:13 | When you select Speakers, that's when
you have access to the Speaker Properties.
| | 06:18 | Clicking Properties allows you to do things
like Change the icon, look at jack information.
| | 06:24 | You can also adjust levels.
| | 06:26 | So there's our speaker volume again.
| | 06:28 | We can use enhancements, so you don't
like the sound, give it a bass boost,
| | 06:33 | room correction as well.
| | 06:35 | I like this one Loudness Equalization,
so you don't get those spikes.
| | 06:38 | As soon as you click them, you can actually
preview it by clicking the Preview button.
| | 06:44 | Turn it off, try Preview again, and you can
see it's quite a bit different. All right.
| | 06:50 | Let's click Cancel for that, and go back
to our tabs across the top of our Sound
| | 06:55 | window and click Recording.
| | 06:57 | So, just as we saw for our speakers, you
can also do this for sound that's going
| | 07:00 | into our system via the microphone.
| | 07:02 | And if you have other devices
connected, they will show up here.
| | 07:05 | Clicking Microphone and Properties
allows you to get into those Properties.
| | 07:10 | So, you can have a listen to this device.
| | 07:13 | If you wanted to have a
speaker go through it, you can.
| | 07:16 | You can adjust the levels here as well.
| | 07:18 | You will notice Microphone and Microphone
Boost levels available to you here.
| | 07:23 | Then, there is an Advanced section as
well, so you can get into some of the
| | 07:27 | rates and bit depths that are
being used when you're running this.
| | 07:31 | Exclusive Mode, as you can see the
checkbox is selected for allowing
| | 07:34 | applications to take exclusive control
of this device, and give exclusive mode
| | 07:39 | applications priority. All right.
| | 07:42 | So, any of these settings can be changed.
| | 07:45 | I'm going to close this up and back we go to
our Sound window, and let's go to the Sounds Tab.
| | 07:50 | Here's where you're going to see certain
sounds that are happening, for example,
| | 07:54 | when we were adjusting the volume,
you heard that background sound.
| | 07:57 | Well here's where we choose what sounds
we hear when certain events happen.
| | 08:01 | For example, here in the Windows section,
as we scroll down, every time we let's
| | 08:06 | say close a program, there's no sound.
| | 08:09 | We just close it up, and nothing happens.
| | 08:11 | You want to hear a sound
when you close a program?
| | 08:14 | Well, you can choose your
sounds by going down to the bottom.
| | 08:18 | Where it says None, you can
choose something like Chimes.
| | 08:22 | Wondering what that sounds like?
| | 08:24 | Click the Test button.
| | 08:26 | Now, every time we close up a program,
we're going to hear that sound.
| | 08:30 | You'll notice there are many,
many events here to choose from.
| | 08:33 | Some of them already have sounds.
| | 08:35 | When you select them, you'll see what
they are, and some don't have sounds,
| | 08:39 | the ones without a speaker icon do not,
and you'll see none selected here.
| | 08:43 | Just scroll down through all of those,
picking and choosing the sounds you want
| | 08:48 | for the various events.
| | 08:50 | When you're done, you can click
Apply, and they will all be applied.
| | 08:54 | So, that's the Sound window.
| | 08:55 | We'll close it up now and we do hear
that sound and we're taken back to our
| | 09:00 | Hardware and Sound portion of our Control Panel.
| | 09:04 | And notice that under Sound, we can go
directly to some of those sections like
| | 09:09 | Change System Sounds.
| | 09:10 | Give it a click, and it takes us directly
to the Sounds Tab here in our Sound window.
| | 09:15 | All right.
| | 09:17 | So that's it for Control Panel as far
as Hardware and Sound go, let's give it a
| | 09:21 | click in the Close button to close it up.
| | 09:23 | We'll go back to our start screen in
Windows 8 by pressing the Windows key
| | 09:28 | on the keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Removing unwanted programs| 00:01 | Here in Windows 8, if there are
programs or apps that have been installed and
| | 00:05 | maybe you used to use them, you no
longer do, maybe you've never used them and
| | 00:08 | they're just taking up space on your computer.
| | 00:10 | We're going to look at ways to uninstall a
program beginning here on our Start screen.
| | 00:15 | Here in the Windows 8 environment,
it's really very simple to remove
| | 00:19 | something you don't want.
| | 00:20 | All you have to do is right click the
Tile, I'm going to go to my Reader, for
| | 00:25 | example, and from the app bar,
you'll find something like Uninstall.
| | 00:29 | Clicking it, asks you to confirm by
clicking the Uninstall button again just
| | 00:34 | noting that you are about to remove
the app and all of its related info.
| | 00:39 | I don't want to do that.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to click in the background
and press Escape on my keyboard, but you
| | 00:45 | could do that with any of these tiles,
right click, you'll see Uninstall on the
| | 00:48 | app bar down below and clicking it confirming,
means you're removing it from the system.
| | 00:54 | But what about those apps that are
running in the old desktop environment?
| | 00:58 | Well let's go to our desktop by
clicking that tile and in the old days
| | 01:03 | it was called "Add/Remove Programs", but
from here, we can access the Control Panel
| | 01:08 | to uninstall a program.
| | 01:09 | So I'm going to go down to the bottom
left corner and when I see my Start tile
| | 01:14 | up here, I'm going to right click it
and choose Control Panel from here.
| | 01:18 | Now notice in the Programs section we
have Uninstall a Program and when you
| | 01:22 | click that link, you're going to see
all of the programs that are installed
| | 01:26 | in this older environment.
| | 01:27 | I have a couple, you may have more, you
may not have any at this point, but all
| | 01:31 | you need to do is select the one you
don't want installed any longer, maybe
| | 01:35 | you're not using it, or you never
did, and with it selected, it's time to
| | 01:40 | uninstall or change a program,
that's what it says up here.
| | 01:43 | What we really want to do is uninstall it.
| | 01:46 | So when we click this right at the very top,
it may take a moment to analyze the program.
| | 01:53 | You can see the Installer Language
selected, for me it defaulted at English.
| | 01:58 | When I click Okay, you'll notice it's
actually going to uninstall this program for me.
| | 02:04 | Again, I'm going to see where
it's located and I confirm that by
| | 02:08 | clicking Uninstall.
| | 02:11 | I'm going to do that.
| | 02:13 | It's not a very big program.
| | 02:15 | It won't take very long.
| | 02:16 | I can show the details while it's working
and you can see line-by-line what's
| | 02:21 | going on in the background before Completed
shows up and my status bar is fully green.
| | 02:26 | All right, I'll click Close, go back
to my list of programs and notice it's
| | 02:30 | no longer installed.
| | 02:32 | I've just removed it.
| | 02:33 | So that's the old way of doing it.
| | 02:35 | We also have the new way of doing it from
our Start screen, so let's close that up,
| | 02:39 | go back to our start screen where
we began, much easier in the Windows 8
| | 02:43 | environment to right click a tile and
uninstall, but you can still uninstall
| | 02:46 | those other programs running
in the old desktop environment.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting default programs| 00:00 | Windows 8 chooses your default programs
that is, "What programs will launch when
| | 00:05 | you double click a file
with a certain extension?"
| | 00:08 | Double clicking a file that ends with
AVI is going to open up in your Video App.
| | 00:13 | If the file ends with mp3, it will open
up in your Music App, for example, but
| | 00:17 | how do we change those defaults
overall and for individual file types?
| | 00:21 | That's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:23 | Here's one thing I like to do
from my Windows 8 Start screen.
| | 00:26 | I don't know if I'm going to be able to
do that from here on this environment or
| | 00:31 | my old desktop environment, so all I'm
going to do is move my mouse to one of
| | 00:35 | the hot corners, top or bottom right-
hand corner, and go up to the Search
| | 00:39 | charm and give it a click.
| | 00:40 | Now I'm going to search for Default.
| | 00:42 | I'm going to start typing in Default
and you'll see what happens, there's
| | 00:45 | Default Programs and this is under Apps.
| | 00:48 | Notice under Settings, if I click
Settings, there's actually more options.
| | 00:52 | There's default programs again, there's set
your default programs, it's the same thing.
| | 00:57 | I could also do it for Settings for
Media and Devices, and I think what I really
| | 01:03 | want to do is choose my
default programs or set them.
| | 01:06 | So either the first one or set your
default programs, when you click it,
| | 01:10 | notice it does take you to
the old desktop environment.
| | 01:12 | You can see, we're actually in the
Control Panel here and under Programs,
| | 01:16 | Default Programs, we're
looking at Set Default Programs.
| | 01:20 | In this case, what we're doing
is setting the overall default.
| | 01:23 | For example, if I scroll down to --
how about Windows Media Player, there it
| | 01:30 | is down on the list.
| | 01:31 | It comes with Windows.
| | 01:32 | When I select it, I have some
options now over here on the right to allow
| | 01:36 | Windows Media Player to be
my default for digital music.
| | 01:40 | So if I click Set Program as Default,
it's going to open all the file types and
| | 01:45 | its protocols that can be used in this program.
| | 01:48 | Clicking it is going to change it from
my Music App to Windows Media Player.
| | 01:54 | How can we test this out?
| | 01:56 | Well, we'll just click Okay to close
this up, takes us back to our Default
| | 02:00 | Programs and leave it there for a second.
| | 02:02 | If you have the Exercise Files, just
double-click the folder to open it up.
| | 02:06 | In a previous lesson, when we went to
our MP3 file, and selected it and in the
| | 02:12 | open section of the Ribbon, the default app
that showed up here was actually our Music App.
| | 02:17 | Now if we wanted to use the Music App
to open up this file, we click the
| | 02:21 | dropdown and choose Music from there, but
our new default and you can see the icon
| | 02:26 | has changed over here as well,
is now our Media Player.
| | 02:28 | All right, let's close this up temporarily
and from here, we'll go back to
| | 02:33 | setting our default programs.
| | 02:35 | We'll set it back to the Music App.
| | 02:37 | So all I have to do is find it, there
it is, the Music App and make this the
| | 02:42 | default program for all file
types related to music files.
| | 02:45 | So we click that, and now we're going
to go back to our Exercise Files,
| | 02:50 | double-click, check it out,
there's our Easy for You MP3.
| | 02:53 | The icon has changed back.
| | 02:55 | If I select it, check out the open
section, my new default is the Music App.
| | 02:59 | So that's how you change the overall defaults
by selecting the app and making it the default.
| | 03:05 | But what if there are certain file
types that you want to use something else?
| | 03:09 | In other words, maybe there's a certain
media file where we do want to use the
| | 03:12 | Windows Media Player and not the Music
App, but just for one file type, not all
| | 03:16 | of the music file types.
| | 03:18 | All right, let's close this up.
| | 03:21 | From here, we're looking
at Set Default Programs.
| | 03:23 | We can go back using the Navigation
button and instead of Set your default
| | 03:28 | programs, we're going to go to Associate
a file type or protocol with a program.
| | 03:32 | So if we click that link, now it's
working in the reverse direction.
| | 03:36 | We're actually going to choose the
file type as opposed to the program.
| | 03:39 | So, for example, if it's MP3, you can
scroll all the way down the alphabetical
| | 03:44 | list until we see MP3, there it is.
| | 03:47 | Select it and you can see by
default, it's using our Music App.
| | 03:51 | If we want to change that though, we
click Change Program, choose Windows Media
| | 03:56 | Player and it's going to change
that association only for MP3 files.
| | 04:02 | So for example, if we scroll up and
down here, we're going to still see the
| | 04:05 | music app is being used for M3U and M4A files.
| | 04:09 | It's not an overall default, just for MP3s.
| | 04:11 | Meaning, if we double click our
Exercise Files again, what are we going to see?
| | 04:16 | Sure enough, the Easy for You MP3 now has
been set back to use the Windows Media Player.
| | 04:23 | Just click it, check out the Open
button, it is Windows Media Player.
| | 04:27 | So that's how we set up the overall defaults
here in Windows as well as the file associations.
| | 04:33 | In other words, we can be very precise
with the types of files and the programs
| | 04:38 | that will open those file types.
| | 04:40 | Let's go back to our Start
screen and continue from there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting accessibility options| 00:00 | For those who have difficulty viewing
a screen, perhaps maybe hearing audio,
| | 00:05 | there are number of accessibility options
built into Windows to help those with
| | 00:10 | disabilities to use our
computers more efficiently.
| | 00:12 | We're going to take a look at them now,
beginning here in the Windows 8
| | 00:16 | environment on our start screen.
| | 00:18 | Let's just move our mouse pointer to the
bottom-right or top-right corner of the
| | 00:21 | screen until you see the charms.
| | 00:23 | We'll go to Settings.
| | 00:24 | Now here under Settings, we'll click
at the very bottom, Change PC Settings.
| | 00:29 | Here's where we're going to find,
some of the Ease of Access PC settings.
| | 00:33 | So with that selected over here on the
right, you'll see at the very top,
| | 00:37 | our first option which is
something called "High contrast."
| | 00:40 | The default view, as you can see is a
very bright background and then everything
| | 00:44 | in the foreground is darker.
| | 00:46 | We can change that to high
contrast by clicking the slider.
| | 00:50 | Now it does take a moment, and you'll
notice the background now becomes dark
| | 00:54 | and everything is bright in the
foreground, a little bit easier to read.
| | 00:57 | Now that's one option.
| | 00:58 | You can see there's also something here
Make everything on your screen bigger.
| | 01:02 | Now this is actually something that is
not supported by my particular display.
| | 01:05 | You may be able to change that.
| | 01:07 | I'm going to go back here to my
High contrast which now appears as on.
| | 01:11 | Click the slider to turn it back off.
| | 01:14 | A little further down, you'll see
something called a Windows shortcut for turning
| | 01:18 | on an accessibility option of your choosing.
| | 01:21 | Windows plus the Volume Up key will
turn on, as you can see from the dropdown,
| | 01:27 | the default is the Narrator, and that
is a voice, it's actually going to read
| | 01:31 | what's on the screen for people who
can't read the screen themselves,
| | 01:34 | but there are other options as well.
| | 01:36 | Maybe you don't want anything to happen
when you use that shortcut or maybe you
| | 01:40 | would rather have the Magnifier than
the Narrator, which allows you to look at
| | 01:43 | portions of your screen or
the whole screen much larger.
| | 01:46 | There's also something called an
On-Screen Keyboard which we can access.
| | 01:50 | We're going to look at this momentarily,
individually, but it's just allows you
| | 01:53 | to use a mouse to type in things on an
on-screen keyboard as opposed to using a
| | 01:58 | real keyboard and your fingers.
| | 02:00 | So we'll leave it at Narrator and down
below as well notifications are going to
| | 02:04 | pop up and they're going to stay
there for five seconds, that's a default.
| | 02:07 | That's not enough time for some people
to find it on the screen and read it.
| | 02:11 | You can click the dropdown and bump
that up a couple of seconds or go to 15
| | 02:15 | seconds, 30 seconds, all
the way up to five minutes.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to leave mine at five.
| | 02:20 | The other thing is the Cursor Thickness.
| | 02:23 | So when you go into a program, let's say
Microsoft Word, for example, and you're
| | 02:26 | ready to start typing.
| | 02:27 | Where is the cursor?
| | 02:28 | It can be difficult to find for
people with viewing disabilities.
| | 02:32 | So the cursor itself which appears
here on the left can be thickened.
| | 02:36 | We'll click the dropdown, where the
default is one, let's jump up to halfway
| | 02:40 | here, we'll click five.
| | 02:41 | Notice how much thicker the cursor is.
| | 02:43 | Click the dropdown again and you can
see we can go all the way down here to 20.
| | 02:50 | Click that and that's a very thick cursor.
| | 02:53 | I'm going to change mine back now to
one, so you may need to scroll up to see
| | 02:57 | the one, give it a click.
| | 02:59 | Those are some of the Ease of Access
Settings available to us here in the
| | 03:02 | Windows 8 environment, but there is
something else called the Ease of Access
| | 03:06 | Center, which we can access
in the old desktop environment.
| | 03:10 | So let's press the Windows key and go
back to that technique we just used to get
| | 03:14 | to our Ease of Access options.
| | 03:16 | We're going to go to the charms.
| | 03:17 | This time though when we move to the bottom-
right or top-right corner and the charms appear.
| | 03:22 | Let's go up to Search.
| | 03:23 | We'll click that and we're going to type in
"Ease of," and start to type in, "Access."
| | 03:30 | There are no apps, as you can see, but there
are number of settings if we go to settings.
| | 03:35 | There's Ease of Access right there.
| | 03:37 | That's where we just came from, so
that's one way to get there, if we need to go
| | 03:40 | back, but there's also something
called Ease of Access Center.
| | 03:44 | Let's give that a click.
| | 03:45 | You'll notice we're taken to our old
desktop environment and you may have heard
| | 03:49 | a voice in the background and that's
because of an option that's typically
| | 03:52 | turned on and that is to scan the section
and you'll also hear that section read aloud.
| | 03:58 | So all I'm going to do is turn these off,
so you can hear what I'm saying,
| | 04:02 | but the section down below which is the
Start Magnifiers, Start Narrator, Set Up
| | 04:07 | High Contrast in your on-screen keyboard,
as you can see from here, with these
| | 04:10 | checked off, they'll be read aloud.
| | 04:12 | It'll scan through them individually,
and the user can hit the spacebar to
| | 04:16 | select whatever is highlighted.
| | 04:18 | It's a nice little feature for people
who have difficulty reading the screen,
| | 04:21 | but we can access these
individually as well just by selecting them.
| | 04:25 | So if we want to start the Magnifier,
for example, we could click it here and
| | 04:31 | you can see the default view, for me,
it happens to be set to 200%.
| | 04:35 | We can click this little
magnifying glass to go in and change that.
| | 04:38 | I like 200%, but the view as you can
see it's zooming in my entire screen.
| | 04:43 | I have to use my mouse to move to the left,
down to the bottom to be able to see
| | 04:48 | all of the screen, but if I want, I
can go back to this magnifying glass and
| | 04:53 | change the view to something else like a Lens.
| | 04:56 | With the lens, now all I have is a
little square that I can move around.
| | 05:00 | So if I have difficulty reading what's
going at the bottom of this window,
| | 05:04 | I just move that down.
| | 05:05 | You can see it's kind of like holding
a magnifying glass over the area I want
| | 05:09 | to be able to read.
| | 05:11 | All right, we'll go back to the magnifying
glass so click there, to get back to those settings.
| | 05:15 | The other option is something called Docked.
| | 05:18 | When we click that, we'll have a Docked area,
typically it's at the top of your screen.
| | 05:22 | So as you move your mouse around below,
you can see what's happening and I move
| | 05:26 | over here to Exercise Files.
| | 05:27 | I can see that at the top.
| | 05:29 | So it's a little bit easier to read at the top.
| | 05:32 | This docked area can be moved, so
we could move it over to the left.
| | 05:36 | Let's go all the way to the left and you
can see how it snaps into position there.
| | 05:40 | If we wanted to, we could go to the
other side, the bottom, the top or just
| | 05:44 | simply drag it out from the
border to make it a little larger.
| | 05:49 | I'm going to move mine back to the top
and when it snaps into position at the
| | 05:53 | very top of my screen, I can let go
and I'm back at the default. Okay.
| | 06:00 | Let's go back to the Start Magnifier here,
it brings up that little option where
| | 06:05 | we can change our view back to full
screen, but first, I'm going to bump this
| | 06:09 | down to 100%, change my view
back to full screen and close it up.
| | 06:17 | Okay, that's the Magnifier.
| | 06:18 | There are other options like the
Narrator which will read the screen.
| | 06:22 | Clicking that starts our narrator,
"Narrator settings window, focus on press any
| | 06:27 | key on the keyboard to
hear the name of that key.
| | 06:31 | Press caps lock plus F1 to review
the full set of narrator commands.
| | 06:35 | Press the tab key to
navigate through the options.
| | 06:39 | Press caps lock plus -- to Exit
Narrator dialogue -- exiting narrator."
| | 06:45 | So there we go, that's just a quick look at
it, there are number of different options.
| | 06:48 | It's difficult for me to talk over
the narrator who is going to read the
| | 06:52 | screen and all of the options and give
instructions how to make those various selections.
| | 06:57 | So again, for someone who can't read
this screen, this is an excellent option
| | 07:01 | and they just have to follow
instructions listening to a voice.
| | 07:03 | There is also that on screen keyboard that
we're going to take a look at by clicking it.
| | 07:08 | Now I can move my keyboard wherever
I want it to go and start typing.
| | 07:12 | So for example, if I was in Microsoft
Word I could use this instead of a keyboard.
| | 07:16 | If I had difficulty managing the individual
keys with my fingers, I could use
| | 07:20 | the mouse to come in here and start typing.
| | 07:23 | So let's close that up and there's our
Set Up High Contrast option again, which
| | 07:27 | we saw earlier in the Windows 8 environment.
| | 07:29 | All right, so I'm going
to turn these two back on.
| | 07:34 | "Always scan this section."
| | 07:35 | I hear the Narrator, I'm going to
close up this window and return to my Start
| | 07:39 | screen by hitting the
windows key on the keyboard.
| | 07:42 | That's a quick look at some of the Ease
of Access options you have available to
| | 07:45 | you here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Devices and NetworkingGetting connected| 00:00 | These days you rarely hear the
term "Stand alone computer" anymore.
| | 00:04 | Most computers are connected.
| | 00:07 | That could be connected to the Internet,
could be connected to a work network or
| | 00:11 | a home network, even
something called a home group.
| | 00:13 | All things we're going to
talk about in this chapter.
| | 00:16 | We're going to start right now
though here in Windows 8, looking at your
| | 00:20 | connections to the Internet
and your network connections.
| | 00:24 | One option, from our Start screen here
in Windows 8, is just to go up to the
| | 00:28 | top or bottom right-hand corners, when you see
the charms, go to Search and give it a click.
| | 00:34 | From here, we'll start to type in "Network".
| | 00:38 | You'll notice there is an app, a Network
App, and this is going to take us to the
| | 00:42 | old desktop environment, we'll go there
momentarily, but notice that there are
| | 00:46 | also settings we can access.
| | 00:47 | So when we click settings, we're
going to see some of the windows Metro App
| | 00:51 | style tiles like Connect to a Network.
| | 00:54 | Connect to a Network allows you to
connect to any wireless networks, if you're
| | 00:58 | on a wireless device.
| | 00:59 | If you're on a home computer,
it could be via ethernet.
| | 01:03 | So when we click Connect to a Network,
what you're going to see over on the
| | 01:06 | right-hand side, is any existing
connections and I do have one, the name of your
| | 01:10 | network and whether or not you're connected.
| | 01:14 | Typically, when you plug-in a network
connection here at Windows 8, Windows 8
| | 01:18 | does an excellent job of getting you connected.
| | 01:20 | There's not a whole lot to do.
| | 01:22 | If you do see a network connection here,
give it a right click and you'll see
| | 01:25 | Turn sharing on or off.
| | 01:27 | We can click that to go to a next screen
here where we can choose whether or not
| | 01:32 | we're going to be doing any sharing.
| | 01:34 | So if you go down to "Yes, turn on
sharing and connect to devices," this is
| | 01:38 | great for home or work networks, whereas
if you're going to be in a public place,
| | 01:43 | you don't really want to do that.
| | 01:45 | So clicking yes, turn on sharing and
connect to devices, we'll do exactly that
| | 01:49 | and take you back to your search results here.
| | 01:53 | Let's go to the right-hand side of our
screen now, where we see some of the old
| | 01:57 | style utilities that are going to allow
us to go to that old desktop environment
| | 02:02 | and manage things like network and sharing.
| | 02:05 | You can see we can manage
network passwords here.
| | 02:08 | Here we have set up a connection
or network. Let's go there.
| | 02:12 | When you give this a click, you'll
notice you have some connection types to
| | 02:15 | choose from, "Connect to the Internet."
| | 02:17 | Now in my case, I'm on a computer that
has a broadband connection, hooked up
| | 02:22 | to a modem and typically, like I said
earlier, you don't really have to do
| | 02:27 | much in the way of connecting, it was
all done for me, but if we go to Connect
| | 02:31 | to the Internet and click Next, I'm going to
see that I'm already connected to the internet.
| | 02:36 | If you're not, you have the
option to Set up a new connection.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to go here, just to show
you what it's like to set up a new
| | 02:45 | connection to the internet.
| | 02:46 | There's my broadband, my DSL or cable
that is connected to a modem and when
| | 02:52 | I click that, I can then type in my user
name, this is the user name given to me
| | 02:57 | by my Internet Service Provider, my ISP.
| | 03:00 | They also give me a password.
| | 03:01 | I would type that in here.
| | 03:03 | I can choose whether or not I can
see those characters as I type them
| | 03:07 | and remember this password, so
I never have to login again.
| | 03:10 | The Connection name can also be
changed to whatever I want to call it.
| | 03:13 | I'm on the Rogers Network so I
might call it "Rogers" for example.
| | 03:17 | Now notice also down below, you
can allow other people to use this
| | 03:20 | connection and it allows anyone with access to
this computer to actually use the connection.
| | 03:27 | That's an option you can turn
on by clicking the check box.
| | 03:31 | So when you click Connect, you're
connected to the Internet, but like I said,
| | 03:34 | it might already be done for you
like it was for me here in Windows 8.
| | 03:39 | Let's go down to the bottom left corner
since we're in our desktop environment
| | 03:42 | here and right-click the Start tile
and go to Control Panel, because you also
| | 03:48 | have a Network and Internet
section here you can go to.
| | 03:52 | We'll click that and over here we have
some subsections, Network and Sharing,
| | 03:57 | where we can view the status of our
network and any task, here we can Connect
| | 04:01 | to Existing Networks.
| | 04:03 | Clicking this link allows you to
connect and you can see I'm already
| | 04:06 | connected to Network 2.
| | 04:08 | We can also view network computers and
devices that we can access with this link.
| | 04:13 | Now HomeGroup is something we're going
to talk about in the next movie, so let's
| | 04:17 | jump down to Internet Options where you
can do things like Change Your Homepage
| | 04:21 | when you connect to the Internet,
Manage Browser Add-Ons and Delete Your
| | 04:25 | Browsing History and Cookies.
| | 04:27 | That's something we'll look at later
on when we get into Internet Explorer.
| | 04:32 | Let's just go to the top right corner
of the Network and Internet screen, and
| | 04:37 | we'll just close that up.
| | 04:39 | Let's press our Windows key on the
keyboard to return to the Start screen.
| | 04:42 | That's a quick look at getting
connected, either to the Internet
| | 04:46 | or to an actual network.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting PCs with HomeGroup| 00:00 | If you have many users on multiple PCs,
maybe a Windows 8 tablet even and you're
| | 00:06 | all connected via the network,
Creating a HomeGroup allows you to pick and
| | 00:10 | choose what files you want to
share with others and it's user-based.
| | 00:15 | In other words, each
user has their own settings.
| | 00:17 | We're going to take a look at HomeGroups now.
| | 00:20 | Right from our start screen, let's go
to our settings by using the keyboard
| | 00:23 | shortcut Windows+I. Over here on the
right-hand side, we're going to go to
| | 00:27 | change PC Settings down on the bottom
right-hand corner and you'll notice on the
| | 00:32 | left-hand side, we have a HomeGroup category.
| | 00:34 | We'll give that a click.
| | 00:36 | Now if you're already connected to a
HomeGroup, you're going to see a list of
| | 00:40 | options that you can turn on or off.
| | 00:42 | If there is a HomeGroup available for you
to connect to, you'll also see that here.
| | 00:46 | It looks like somebody named "David on
DAVID-NONMAC-PC did create a HomeGroup,
| | 00:51 | and all I need to know is the password
which I would type in here and then click Join.
| | 00:56 | So you do need to get the password from
the people who create HomeGroups and you
| | 01:01 | can create a HomeGroup from Control Panel.
| | 01:04 | Once it's created, a
password is generated for you.
| | 01:07 | Of course, you can change it at anytime.
| | 01:09 | So if you already are connected, you'll
see a different list of options here on
| | 01:14 | the right-hand side.
| | 01:15 | If you're like me and you're ready to
join one, you'll see those options up here.
| | 01:20 | Now once you're part of the HomeGroup,
you have access to Shared Folders that
| | 01:24 | other users have decided to share with you,
but you also have to pick and choose
| | 01:29 | what you're going to share with anyone
else on the HomeGroup and that's what's
| | 01:32 | going to happen here next.
| | 01:34 | So you'll see that you're getting connected,
changes are being made and then by
| | 01:38 | default, really nothing is being shared.
| | 01:41 | If you wanted to share your
music, you just click the slider.
| | 01:44 | Want to share your
pictures as well? No problem.
| | 01:47 | Remember, these are default folders
and libraries created and by selecting
| | 01:53 | the Shared option, other users, only
those in the HomeGroup, we'll be able to
| | 01:57 | get access to those.
| | 01:59 | Now a little further down, you can also
include all devices on the network like
| | 02:03 | TVs and game consoles being
allowed to play any shared content.
| | 02:09 | So if you want to allow those types
of devices to access your content,
| | 02:12 | go ahead and turn that on.
| | 02:14 | I'm going to leave mine off.
| | 02:15 | Now you're going to see the password
down below and if you wanted to, you could
| | 02:20 | leave the HomeGroup at anytime and then rejoin.
| | 02:23 | Again, you would need that
password to get joined in.
| | 02:26 | So that's a quick look
here in the Windows 8 section.
| | 02:29 | Let's go to our old desktop environment.
| | 02:31 | We'll press our Windows key, click the
desktop, and let's go down to the bottom
| | 02:36 | left-hand corner now.
| | 02:38 | We'll right click our Start
tile and go to Control Panel.
| | 02:42 | From here, you'll notice there's a
Network and Internet section, we'll click
| | 02:46 | that heading and in here a subheading
for HomeGroup. We'll click that.
| | 02:51 | Now from here, you're already going
to see what you've chosen to share,
| | 02:54 | Pictures, Music, Videos.
| | 02:55 | That's what I selected.
| | 02:57 | I can change what I was sharing by going
back to those settings, in my Windows 8
| | 03:01 | environment or I could do it from here as well.
| | 03:03 | Clicking the link allows me to go in
and change it from Not Shared to Shared.
| | 03:07 | I'm going to add Documents
and take out my Pictures.
| | 03:11 | When I click Next, you'll see that I
have changed and updated my settings.
| | 03:16 | Clicking Finish shows me those new settings.
| | 03:19 | Notice that we may also
see messages across the top.
| | 03:22 | HomeGroup is currently sharing
Libraries and then that disappears.
| | 03:26 | You can see the changes appear right up here.
| | 03:28 | I can also change that option to
allow all other devices on the network to
| | 03:33 | access my shared content, I'm not going
to change that one, but there are some
| | 03:37 | other actions down below.
| | 03:39 | So we can view or print the HomeGroup
password so we don't forget it.
| | 03:43 | If I want to take a peek at it,
there it is, pretty simple, password.
| | 03:47 | I could print the page.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to click Cancel and we
can also, if we wanted to leave the
| | 03:52 | HomeGroup from here.
| | 03:54 | Change Advanced Sharing Options,
something we're going to talk about a little
| | 03:57 | bit later on in this chapter,
so we'll skip over that.
| | 04:00 | You can see, there's that Start the
HomeGroup Troubleshooter link that allows
| | 04:04 | us to figure out what's happening when
we can't join a HomeGroup, but here in
| | 04:08 | Windows 8, it seems to be all automatic
and if there is a HomeGroup, you're
| | 04:12 | going to see it there, you will automatically
create HomeGroups from Windows 8,
| | 04:18 | when you're connected to the network, so
you can go in and turn on any sharing options.
| | 04:22 | The HomeGroup is created,
if there isn't one already.
| | 04:26 | Again, you'll have a password that's
generated that you need to share with
| | 04:29 | others if they want to be
able to access your HomeGroup.
| | 04:33 | So let's close this up, go back to our
Start screen by pressing the Windows key
| | 04:37 | on the keyboard and we'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting to another computer with Remote Desktop| 00:00 | Way back in Windows XP, a new feature
known as Remote Desktop came about.
| | 00:04 | It allows you to remotely access another
person's computer and take control.
| | 00:10 | Think of the trouble shooting
scenario where that could be very handy.
| | 00:13 | First we're going to look at Giving Access.
| | 00:16 | If you wanted to allow someone to
remotely access your computer, you have to
| | 00:20 | enable access first.
| | 00:21 | So how do we do that?
| | 00:23 | Let's go to the top or bottom right
corner of our Start screen in the hot corner.
| | 00:27 | That displays our charms, we'll
click Search and from here just type
| | 00:31 | in the word, "remote."
| | 00:32 | Now you will see one app, "Remote
Desktop Connection" we'll go there
| | 00:36 | momentarily, but right now
let's go down to Settings.
| | 00:40 | From here you'll see one that
allows remote access to your computer.
| | 00:44 | This is just a shortcut for going to
the old desktop environment, opening up
| | 00:47 | Control Panel, going to System
and then going to System Access.
| | 00:51 | When we click it here, we go directly
there, the Remote tab is selected and
| | 00:55 | you can see Remote Desktop down below.
By default, you will not allow remote
| | 01:01 | connections to your computer, but if
you do need to give remote access,
| | 01:05 | you can enable it by clicking the radio
button and there's another option here
| | 01:09 | toallow connections only from
computers running Remote Desktop with Network
| | 01:14 | Level Authentication.
| | 01:16 | So it makes it a little more
secure, but it also limits you.
| | 01:19 | I'm going to leave this
turned off and click Apply.
| | 01:22 | When we click OK, we've now
granted access through our computer.
| | 01:26 | All we have to do is provide that
person with our computer name or
| | 01:30 | IP address and they'll be able to use Remote
Access to get in and take control of our computer.
| | 01:36 | Now we can disable that access at anytime.
| | 01:40 | Now let's say someone needs us to
access their computer and they've already
| | 01:44 | gone through the process of enabling access,
they've given us their IP address. How do we get in?
| | 01:50 | Well it's actually quite simple.
| | 01:52 | Let's go back to our start screen.
| | 01:54 | We'll go to hot corner, top or bottom
right-hand corner of your screen and
| | 01:58 | click the Search charm.
| | 02:00 | Again we'll type in remote, this time
we are going to use the app, the Remote
| | 02:04 | Desktop Connection.
| | 02:06 | It does take us back to
our old desktop environment.
| | 02:09 | Next we'll type in the computer name
and that could be the IP address that was
| | 02:13 | given to us, so we click Connect.
| | 02:16 | You maybe prompted for user names and passwords.
| | 02:18 | If you had gone in before, it just
takes you directly and I'm now on another
| | 02:22 | computer and I have full access to the desktop.
| | 02:25 | So I could start doing things
like going into these folders.
| | 02:29 | I can go down and access the start
button and at anytime, we can disconnect by
| | 02:34 | going to the top and clicking the Close button.
| | 02:38 | It does warn us that we're about to
end or disconnect our remote session.
| | 02:43 | We can click OK and we're back to our
own environment now and let's press our
| | 02:48 | Windows key to go back to the Start screen.
| | 02:50 | That's a quick look at Remote Desktop.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Selecting sharing options for networks| 00:00 | When you setup a network, join a network,
maybe a HomeGroup, for example, there
| | 00:04 | are certain libraries, maybe even
folders and files that are shared.
| | 00:08 | Well of course, we can always go back
and make changes to those settings and
| | 00:12 | we can take it a step further
narrowing it down to specific folders and even
| | 00:16 | files that we want to share with people, and
that's what we're going to talk about right now.
| | 00:21 | We'll start by going directly to the desktop
because that's where we handle all of that.
| | 00:26 | Once at the desktop, let's go down to
the very bottom on the taskbar where
| | 00:29 | you'll find a shortcut to your
File Explorer. Give it a click.
| | 00:33 | Down the left-hand side, you'll see the
HomeGroup section where you'll see any
| | 00:37 | homegroups that you may have
joined as well as your own.
| | 00:40 | So for me I've joined one called David.
| | 00:43 | I've also got my own here called David Rivers.
| | 00:45 | Look what happens when you click
Homegroup over here in the left-hand side in
| | 00:49 | the navigation pane.
| | 00:50 | Well, you'll see the homegroups that
you are a part of, but look what happened
| | 00:54 | to the Ribbon up top, we now have a HomeGroup
tab and we have some options here for sharing.
| | 01:00 | If you don't like any of the settings
that you originally set up, you can always
| | 01:04 | go back by clicking Share Libraries and Devices.
| | 01:07 | You'll see the current permissions.
| | 01:09 | It looks like I'm sharing everything
here except for Printers and Devices.
| | 01:13 | To make a change, you just click the dropdown.
| | 01:15 | Maybe I do want to share my
Printers and Devices, but not my Videos.
| | 01:19 | So I'll click that and change it to Not Shared.
| | 01:21 | Once you have your Settings, just click
Next, you'll see a confirmation that the
| | 01:26 | settings have been updated so you can
click Finish and those changes take route.
| | 01:30 | That's for sharing libraries,
libraries that your entire HomeGroup will have
| | 01:36 | access to, but what if you want to
share another folder that's not even in one
| | 01:40 | of those libraries, like our
Exercise Files, for example?
| | 01:42 | Well, in that case, you
actually go to the folder itself.
| | 01:46 | I'm going to go to my Exercise Files.
| | 01:48 | You can use any folder you like if you
don't have the Exercise Files folder,
| | 01:52 | but from here after clicking Desktop,
I'm going to click Exercise Files once
| | 01:57 | to select it and now, I'm
going to go up to the Share tab.
| | 02:02 | Now it's from here where I
can choose sharing options.
| | 02:05 | But you may have noticed in my current
view, I can't really tell if Exercise
| | 02:09 | Files is being shared.
| | 02:10 | I can hover over that folder to get
a little bit of information about it.
| | 02:14 | But if I really want to know, I'm
going to go and change that view first.
| | 02:18 | So let's click the View tab.
| | 02:20 | Details is fine, so we can see all the
details about our folders and our files,
| | 02:24 | but what we really need is
the Details Pane as well.
| | 02:27 | There is a keyboard shortcut, Alt+Shift+P.
Let's give it a click and now we
| | 02:31 | can see over here the actual details.
| | 02:33 | In this case, the date modified for me.
| | 02:35 | I don't see anything here about sharing.
| | 02:38 | So let's go back to the Share tab now,
and if I want to share this with my
| | 02:42 | HomeGroup, the entire folder, I can
choose to click HomeGroup with view in
| | 02:47 | brackets, meaning my Homegroup.
| | 02:49 | Anyone who is part of that group will
be able to view the contents but not edit
| | 02:53 | those contents, or I can also give
them read and write access by choosing
| | 02:57 | Homegroup (view and edit).
| | 03:00 | When I click that, it will take a
moment but the change appears over here in my
| | 03:05 | Details Pane Shared with Homegroup,
and I can see it right there.
| | 03:09 | Now, of course, maybe I didn't want
to share the entire folder, maybe just
| | 03:13 | specific files in that folder, I can
stop sharing it any time from here as well.
| | 03:18 | So click Stop Sharing and you'll see
that status disappear from our Details Pane.
| | 03:24 | Instead, we're going to go inside the
Exercise Files folder with a double-click
| | 03:29 | and now, we can select the
files that we do want to share.
| | 03:33 | Let's select just our image files.
| | 03:35 | I'm going to click Gallery 1, hold
down shift and click Swatch to select
| | 03:40 | all three of those.
| | 03:42 | Over here on the right, I do see details,
nothing here about sharing though,
| | 03:47 | so let's go to the same
section here under Share with.
| | 03:50 | We can choose to share as a read-only
option with view or read and write access
| | 03:56 | with Homegroup (view and edit).
| | 03:59 | When we click that, we're actually now
sharing the files themselves, not the
| | 04:03 | entire folder with our Homegroup.
| | 04:05 | Meaning, as a Homegroup member, when I
go to look at this folder, I'll see that
| | 04:10 | there are three files I have access to.
| | 04:13 | Now we don't really see anything happen
over here on the right indicating that
| | 04:17 | that has actually worked, but trust
me, you're now sharing those files.
| | 04:22 | To stop sharing those files, of course we
have the Stop Sharing option at any time.
| | 04:28 | Now, that's an entire HomeGroup, but if
you want to pick and choose the people
| | 04:31 | you're sharing with, you can have the
file selected, click Specific People,
| | 04:36 | the third option, and a window opens
up where you can pick and choose people
| | 04:40 | that already exist.
| | 04:41 | You can see I'm the only one here in my
homegroup, but we can click a drop-down
| | 04:46 | to share with everyone that makes it
public or just your Homegroup from here or
| | 04:51 | you can also type in
email addresses and add them.
| | 04:55 | Let's go to the dropdown, choose Everyone,
and when we click Share, they become
| | 05:01 | public files and you'll see a
confirmation that your files are shared.
| | 05:05 | You can email someone links to
these by clicking the email link.
| | 05:09 | You can copy and paste the links into
an email or another program by using
| | 05:13 | the copy link here.
| | 05:14 | Otherwise, just click Done, and those
files are now shared or made public.
| | 05:20 | Let's close up File Explorer and press the
Windows key to go back to the Start screen.
| | 05:24 | That's a quick look at various ways
of sharing your files and your folders,
| | 05:29 | even your entire libraries with individual
members and Homegroup members here
| | 05:35 | in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and removing devices| 00:00 | When it comes to connecting devices to
your Windows 8 computer, really, all you
| | 00:05 | need to do is plug it in and odds are
Windows 8 is going to recognize it and
| | 00:09 | it will be usable within seconds.
| | 00:12 | There are occasions though where
devices are not recognized, often on a network
| | 00:16 | for example, and there will be
occasions when you want to remove devices.
| | 00:19 | So we're going to talk about adding
and removing devices here in Windows 8.
| | 00:23 | Let's start by going to our Windows 8
settings using the keyboard shortcut
| | 00:27 | Windows+I. Now over here on the right-
hand side, we'll go to the change PC
| | 00:33 | Settings link at the very bottom.
| | 00:35 | This opens up our settings and you'll notice on
the left-hand side we do have a Devices heading.
| | 00:40 | Let's give it a click.
| | 00:41 | Now, this is going to show you a list
of devices currently connected
| | 00:45 | and recognized as being connected to your computer.
| | 00:48 | I have a monitor for example,
a microphone, speakers and so on.
| | 00:53 | You'll also notice that at the very
top an Add device option where if you had
| | 00:58 | something plugged in and it wasn't being
recognized you could go here to add it manually.
| | 01:02 | We'll talk about that momentarily.
| | 01:04 | But typically, what you'll do is plug
in a device like a printer, maybe a USB
| | 01:09 | drive, for example, and it will
just simply show up on the list.
| | 01:12 | That's what I'm going to do right now.
| | 01:14 | I'm going to plug in my external
USB drive and let's see what happens.
| | 01:18 | So I plugged it in, you could see it
just takes a moment to be recognized on the
| | 01:23 | list and installed and it's now
connected and ready to be used.
| | 01:26 | Now, because it is a USB drive, it'll
show up in File Explorer if I wanted to.
| | 01:31 | Just keep in mind, if you want to
remove this from your computer physically,
| | 01:35 | it should be ejected.
| | 01:37 | Now, we can remove it directly
from here in the Devices section.
| | 01:41 | We can add and remove devices although
we don't see a remove a device option.
| | 01:46 | Just by clicking the
device we do want to remove,
| | 01:48 | we select it and you'll notice
some minus sign of to the right.
| | 01:52 | Clicking this means you need to confirm that
you do want to remove this from the computer.
| | 01:57 | So we'll click remove,
it's no longer on my list.
| | 02:00 | It's safe to remove it physically
now from the computer, if I wanted to.
| | 02:05 | So that's what we can do
here from Windows 8 PC Settings.
| | 02:09 | What about from the old desktop environment?
| | 02:12 | Let's hit the Windows key to go back
to our Start screen and click Desktop.
| | 02:16 | Next, we're going to go to our Control Panel.
| | 02:18 | I like to go down to the bottom left
corner when I see the start button,
| | 02:22 | right-click and go to Control Panel from here.
| | 02:26 | Next, we're going to go to, as you
can see under Hardware and Sound,
| | 02:30 | View Devices And Printers.
| | 02:31 | Notice also there's an Add a Device link.
| | 02:33 | We're going to go to View Devices and
Printers, and when we click that, we're
| | 02:37 | going to see the same list, but
it looks a little bit different.
| | 02:40 | You'll actually see icons
representing the devices.
| | 02:43 | We can select those to get
information about them down below.
| | 02:47 | Just like we saw from the Windows 8
settings, we can go up here to Add a Device,
| | 02:52 | Add a Printer and Remove a
Device, if we wanted to as well.
| | 02:57 | Let's say we had a printer plugged in
and maybe it's on the network and it's
| | 03:01 | just not recognized, we don't
have any printer showing up here.
| | 03:04 | We can go to Add a Printer, it's
going to search for available printers.
| | 03:09 | Now if it's on the network it might not find it.
| | 03:12 | In that case, we're going to see a
list of nothing here, in other words,
| | 03:16 | no available printers to be connected.
| | 03:19 | There is a link down below that, that says,
"The printer that I want isn't listed."
| | 03:23 | You can see no printers were found.
| | 03:25 | So, I can click this link here and
have a number of options that allow me to
| | 03:30 | manually connect to a printer.
| | 03:32 | So if it's on the network,
for example, a shared printer.
| | 03:34 | All I have to do is type in the path or
use the Browse button to go and find it.
| | 03:40 | Same thing goes for these other options
including printers on a network with an
| | 03:45 | address or a host name, bluetooth or
wireless printers, local printers and
| | 03:50 | network printers with manual settings.
| | 03:52 | So they are all available to me here if
they're not recognized automatically on the list.
| | 03:56 | But like I said earlier, typically when
you plug something in these days like a
| | 04:00 | printer, it will be recognized
automatically and installed and connected to your
| | 04:05 | computer and ready to use.
| | 04:07 | But you can always go to the PC settings
in Windows 8 or come to the old desktop
| | 04:11 | environment here under Devices and
Printers to do the exact same thing.
| | 04:16 | Let's press our Windows key
to go back to the Start screen.
| | 04:19 | That's a little bit about adding and
removing devices here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Windows SecurityKeeping your PC secure with Windows Update| 00:00 | Well, let's face it.
| | 00:01 | We live in a world where
computer security is very important.
| | 00:04 | Keeping our Windows 8 computer secure can be
accomplished through many different options.
| | 00:09 | One of them is Windows Update.
| | 00:11 | We're going to look at it now.
| | 00:13 | Keeping your computer up-to-date
with the latest software and security
| | 00:17 | updates can be achieved automatically
or using a number of settings.
| | 00:21 | So, here from our Start screen, we can
access Windows Update directly from our
| | 00:26 | settings or we can go up to the top right
corner, let's say and click the Search charm.
| | 00:32 | From here, let's just start
to type in "Windows update."
| | 00:36 | You'll notice when we go to Settings,
we do have Windows Update available to us
| | 00:40 | from here as well as Check For
Updates which is a part of Windows Update.
| | 00:44 | So let's give Windows Update a click.
| | 00:46 | It takes us to our settings.
| | 00:48 | Now we could've just gone to PC
settings and selected at the very bottom
| | 00:51 | here Windows Update.
| | 00:53 | From here, you'll notice over on the
right-hand side that we're automatically
| | 00:57 | setup to install updates by default.
| | 01:00 | Now, that's my setting, yours maybe
different and I'll show you were we change
| | 01:04 | those settings momentarily.
| | 01:06 | But for now, here's why we go to
check for updates whenever we're ready.
| | 01:10 | So instead of waiting for our settings
to do it for us, we can check for updates
| | 01:14 | at anytime by clicking Check for Updates.
| | 01:17 | But instead of doing that,
we're going to go to our desktop.
| | 01:19 | So, let's close this up.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to go to the very top,
click and drag it down to the very bottom.
| | 01:25 | I'm going to go to my Desktop now.
| | 01:27 | Here from the very bottom left-hand
corner right click the Start icon and
| | 01:33 | click Control Panel.
| | 01:37 | From our Control Panel, we
can also access Windows Update.
| | 01:40 | Now one of the options instead of
browsing through the various sections and
| | 01:44 | subsections, notice that there is a
flashing cursor in the top right-hand
| | 01:47 | corner, just type in "Windows Update."
| | 01:51 | You'll see it narrows it down, there it is.
| | 01:53 | We can Check For Updates, Install
Optional Updates, all these options fall under
| | 01:57 | the heading Windows Updates.
| | 01:59 | So let's click that heading, it just
takes us to that section of our Control Panel.
| | 02:03 | Notice it's under System and Security,
we can go back through that at anytime.
| | 02:08 | Now from here, you'll notice that, indeed,
we are setup to automatically install
| | 02:12 | updates, that's what I see on my machine.
| | 02:15 | You might see the same if you
haven't changed any of your defaults.
| | 02:18 | You'll also see some information
about recent checks for updates.
| | 02:22 | If any updates were installed,
looks like, I did have something done
| | 02:26 | today earlier on today.
| | 02:27 | Notice that we receive updates
for Windows only on this computer.
| | 02:32 | Now over on the left-hand side, you'll
notice we can Check for updates just like
| | 02:36 | we could from our Windows 8 environment.
| | 02:39 | We can Change the settings, clicking here
is where you go to change those defaults.
| | 02:44 | Installing updates automatically which
is recommended is the default and you can
| | 02:49 | see that's what's chosen on my computer,
but we could have updates downloaded
| | 02:54 | but be prompted to install them.
| | 02:56 | So we can choose whether or not
we want to install the updates.
| | 02:59 | Check for updates but let me choose
whether to download and install them or we
| | 03:04 | could choose never check for updates.
| | 03:06 | Of course, that means our computer
won't be so busy, always browsing the
| | 03:09 | internet for updates and
downloading them, possibly installing them.
| | 03:13 | But you'll miss out on many of the
important security updates that Microsoft
| | 03:17 | sends out on a regular basis.
| | 03:19 | So to keep our computer secure, it's
probably important that we at least choose
| | 03:24 | something like Download Updates and
then choose whether to install them.
| | 03:27 | I'm going to switch to that one.
| | 03:29 | Notice that updates will automatically
be downloaded in the background and a
| | 03:34 | little further down, you can see
there's a checkmark next to it, "Give me
| | 03:37 | recommended updates the same
way I receive important updates."
| | 03:41 | So, recommended updates are not
necessities, but they are recommended from
| | 03:46 | Microsoft and we can pick and choose
which ones we want to include and install.
| | 03:51 | All we have to do to select the
setting and secure it is click OK.
| | 03:56 | Now you'll notice that, "You're set
to automatically download updates,"
| | 03:59 | is the message if you follow it along with me
and they will not be automatically installed.
| | 04:04 | But we'll be prompted to, so we'll know
when those updates come along and then
| | 04:08 | we can choose, at a time that's
convenient for us, to install them.
| | 04:12 | We can also go to our Update
history to see what's happened.
| | 04:15 | You can see all of these different updates.
| | 04:16 | Look at all the updates for Windows
Defender speaking of security, so all of
| | 04:22 | these were done automatically status.
| | 04:23 | You could see succeeded.
| | 04:25 | There was a recommended one that was
also installed because of my defaults.
| | 04:30 | Of course now, I'm going to be prompted
for any and all of these and download
| | 04:34 | the ones that are important to me.
| | 04:35 | All right, so let's click OK.
| | 04:38 | We'll close this up.
| | 04:39 | Return to our Start screen by
pressing the Windows key on the keyboard.
| | 04:43 | We'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and resolving security issues with Action Center| 00:00 | IF you've ever used the Action Center in
previous versions of Microsoft Windows
| | 00:04 | you still have access to it here in Windows 8.
| | 00:07 | We're going to look at a couple
of different ways to get there.
| | 00:10 | The Action Center basically is going
to show you what's going on with your
| | 00:14 | computer if there are any issues and
offer you ways to resolve those issues.
| | 00:18 | So, from our Start screen here, instead
of browsing around for it, why don't
| | 00:22 | we just go to one of the hot corners in the
top or bottom right corner of your screen?
| | 00:27 | When the terms appear click Search.
| | 00:29 | I always like to do this the fastest
way to get to the Action Center is just
| | 00:33 | to type in "Action."
| | 00:34 | It doesn't look like there are any apps,
but there are two settings and when we
| | 00:38 | click Settings over here on the right-
hand side, we see two options, two ways to
| | 00:42 | get to our Action Center.
| | 00:43 | Both of these will take you to the
exact same place, so click one of them.
| | 00:47 | It does bring us to our old desktop
environment with the Action Center open.
| | 00:51 | Notice that it's in the Control
Panel under System and Security.
| | 00:54 | There's always a faster way to get here.
| | 00:57 | For me, and of course every computer
will look different, I do have some
| | 01:01 | security issues or potential issues.
| | 01:03 | For example, Windows Update.
| | 01:05 | If you followed along with me in the
previous lesson, we changed one of the settings.
| | 01:08 | So we're seeing a color-coded issue here.
| | 01:11 | It's not a red issue, it's not urgent,
but it is a warning that with Windows
| | 01:16 | Updates set to install updates after
checking with us, we might miss things.
| | 01:20 | We can go directly to changing
those settings from here, that's nice.
| | 01:24 | Also, I have one here about trusting this PC.
| | 01:27 | So my saved passwords for various apps,
websites and networks are not going to
| | 01:32 | sync until I trust this PC.
| | 01:35 | If I do trust this PC, any saved
passwords will work on my other devices as well.
| | 01:40 | It looks like I have one under maintenance
here with regards to something
| | 01:44 | I haven't installed VMware.
| | 01:45 | Notice that in this case the
driver is available online.
| | 01:49 | I can view the message details, I can even
archive this message if I want to keep it.
| | 01:54 | So the nice thing is I do find out
what's going on, it's color coded.
| | 01:58 | I'll see yellow for issues that are
not so urgent, red if they are very
| | 02:02 | urgent and then I'll see buttons with
access to options that will allow me
| | 02:07 | to resolve those issues.
| | 02:09 | Now we can set up our Action Center to
behave a certain way by going to the left
| | 02:13 | here and clicking Change Action Center Settings.
| | 02:17 | From here, you'll see which messages are
turned on and which ones are turned off.
| | 02:21 | By default, you should be seeing
checkmarks in every single one of these check boxes.
| | 02:25 | So for example, I'm going to see
messages in the Security section with
| | 02:29 | regards to Windows Update and I certainly
did, as well as all of these other
| | 02:34 | options we see here.
| | 02:36 | Now if I don't like seeing things
that maybe deal with storage space, I can
| | 02:39 | turn that off here in the Maintenance section,
those messages won't show up in my Action Center.
| | 02:45 | Maybe windows Backup as well, I
don't like being nagged about that.
| | 02:48 | When we click OK, we save those settings.
| | 02:51 | We're taken back to our
Action Center. Let's close it up.
| | 02:54 | Go to the top right, click the Close button.
| | 02:56 | Here in our desktop environment, we
can access the Action Center just like we
| | 03:00 | did in previous versions of Microsoft Windows.
| | 03:03 | Just go down to the very bottom of
your screen on the Taskbar, and it's
| | 03:07 | that little white flag.
| | 03:09 | The flag of course, if you have any urgent
issues or messages that need to be read,
| | 03:12 | you'll see a little red X over them.
| | 03:15 | Right now, I can just click the flag
and notice I have three messages, which
| | 03:20 | I can go directly to by clicking, change
my windows update settings from here,
| | 03:24 | solve problems, trust this PC, those
are the three items that appeared in my
| | 03:28 | Action Center or I can just go directly
to the Action Center by clicking Open
| | 03:33 | Action Center and I'm right back inside.
| | 03:36 | So the Action Center is a great tool
for finding out what's going on in the
| | 03:41 | background, what's happening in your PC,
if there are any issues and of course,
| | 03:45 | having access to options that will
allow you to resolve them on the spot.
| | 03:49 | Let's press our Windows key to go
back to our Start screen and continue
| | 03:53 | from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Battling malicious software with Windows Defender| 00:00 | Well unfortunately, when you're connected
to the internet, you're also connected
| | 00:04 | to things that are not so desirable out there.
| | 00:07 | You may have heard of malware, for example.
| | 00:09 | These are hidden programs that
can dig into your computer and
| | 00:12 | retrieve information.
| | 00:13 | Well, there's something called
Windows Defender that will work against
| | 00:17 | those kinds of things.
| | 00:18 | Scanning your computer and devices for
things that don't look right and even
| | 00:22 | removing them or quarantining them.
| | 00:24 | We're going to take a
look at Windows Defender now.
| | 00:26 | Again, as I always like to do, I'm
going to access the charms by going to the
| | 00:31 | top right corner or bottom right-hand
corner and clicking the Search charm.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to type in "Defender."
| | 00:37 | As I start to type that in, you can see
there's actually an app called Windows Defender.
| | 00:41 | If I go to Settings, there it is again,
and you can see exactly what it's going
| | 00:45 | to do, scan for malware and
other potentially unwanted software.
| | 00:50 | So let's go there by clicking it.
| | 00:51 | That's going to take us to our old
desktop environment, and here we are looking
| | 00:56 | at several tabs across the top.
| | 00:58 | First, you're going to see
your status. Mine is Protected.
| | 01:01 | Now, we can turn this feature on and we
can change some of the settings as well.
| | 01:06 | But right now, with the Home tab selected,
you can see what's happening on this computer.
| | 01:10 | Real-time Protection is turned
on so it's happening as items are
| | 01:14 | being downloaded they're
being scanned, viruses and spyware
| | 01:17 | definitions are up-to-date.
| | 01:19 | Over here on the right-hand side, I
can run a scan right now, a quick scan, a
| | 01:23 | full scan which will take a lot more
time and then I can also do a custom scan
| | 01:28 | where I can pick and choose
what's going to be scanned and where.
| | 01:31 | So instead of me clicking this, and
you watching my computer get scanned.
| | 01:35 | Let's just go to some of the other
tabs beginning with the Settings tab
| | 01:39 | over here on the right.
| | 01:41 | You're going to see a number of different
settings or categories down the left,
| | 01:45 | the first one being Real-time protection.
| | 01:47 | You can see it is recommended that
this be checked off or turned on, mine is.
| | 01:52 | Real-time protection is going to
alert you whenever malicious or potentially
| | 01:56 | unwanted software attempts to
install itself and run on your PC.
| | 02:00 | So I like that feature.
| | 02:02 | You know exactly when it's happening
and you also know that Windows Defender
| | 02:06 | is there protecting you.
| | 02:07 | You can choose which files and locations
to exclude from those scans, file types
| | 02:13 | and processes can also be excluded
just a matter of browsing to them.
| | 02:17 | Under Advanced, there's one important
one here that I kind of like and that is
| | 02:21 | scanning removable drives.
| | 02:22 | I almost always have a removable drive stuck
in my computer and I like to include those.
| | 02:28 | So it's not bad to have them scanned while
everything else is being scanned as well.
| | 02:32 | Also, if you're the Administrator, you
have the ability to turn this on or off
| | 02:37 | and notice my Windows Defender is turned on.
| | 02:40 | We saw that from the Home tab.
| | 02:42 | Let's go to Update now.
| | 02:44 | Here's where you can find out if your
definitions are up-to-date and if they're not,
| | 02:48 | you'll see some information about them.
| | 02:51 | You can click the Update
button to get the latest.
| | 02:54 | Then History is where you're going to
see what's been going on, Quarantined items,
| | 02:57 | Allowed items, All detected items.
| | 03:01 | You can view the details for any of
those by clicking View Details and
| | 03:06 | lucky for me, I haven't had any issues.
| | 03:08 | Down below Quarantined items, you can
see it can be removed, you can pick and
| | 03:12 | choose items that should be allowed.
| | 03:14 | But because I have nothing, those two
buttons are dimmed out and not accessible.
| | 03:19 | So I'm going to close up Windows
Defender knowing that I am protected,
| | 03:23 | and I'm going to see information in real-time.
| | 03:26 | Let's press our Windows key
to go back to the Start screen.
| | 03:29 | Now you know about Windows Defender, a
great tool to have on your side keeping
| | 03:33 | you protected from
potentially malicious software.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling access with user accounts| 00:00 | If you're going to have more than one
person using your Windows 8 computer or
| | 00:05 | device, you may want to consider adding
additional user accounts so they can log
| | 00:10 | in as themselves and have access to
their own area separate from yours.
| | 00:15 | Well, there's a couple of different ways to
work with user accounts here in Windows 8.
| | 00:19 | Beginning with our Start screen here,
we can go to our PC Settings.
| | 00:23 | Let's use the keyboard shortcut Windows+I.
Next, we'll go to the bottom
| | 00:27 | right-hand corner and click Change PC
Settings and from here we'll select Users.
| | 00:32 | With Users selected, you're going to
see your own account first, right at the
| | 00:36 | very top, you'll see your name, your
e-mail address, there's an option for
| | 00:40 | trusting the PC, switching
to a local account and so on.
| | 00:44 | There are also Sign-in options
we'll talk about a little bit later on.
| | 00:47 | Right now, we're scrolling down to the
very bottom where you'll see a button
| | 00:51 | here for adding a user.
| | 00:53 | So let's say I'm going to be sharing
this with another person named Karen.
| | 00:58 | I'll click Add User.
| | 00:59 | I can type in their e-mail address.
| | 01:01 | This is going to be there windows sign-in.
| | 01:04 | Now, if I wanted to, notice down at the
bottom, I could have them sign up for a
| | 01:08 | new e-mail address if they don't already
have one or sign-in without a Microsoft
| | 01:13 | account, that is possible.
| | 01:15 | So I'll click that.
| | 01:17 | Now I have two options Microsoft account
of course, means that they'd be signing
| | 01:21 | in and have access to the Windows
Store et cetera, Microsoft apps.
| | 01:26 | But with a local account, they will
be totally separated from all of that.
| | 01:30 | They'll have a user name, they'll have
a password and they won't be able to get
| | 01:35 | at the downloadable apps,
so it have to set up later.
| | 01:39 | Also any settings for this account won't
be synced across the PCs that they use.
| | 01:44 | So let's choose Local Account.
| | 01:45 | We'll give this person a username,
I'm just going to type in Karen.
| | 01:49 | We'll give her a password and as the
administrator, we'll have to give her this
| | 01:53 | password so she can log in
and change it, potentially.
| | 01:55 | Notice we don't see what we're
typing unless we click the eye icon.
| | 02:01 | We need to reenter that because we
don't see what we're typing, just to
| | 02:04 | ensure that we've typed it in exactly
the same way both times, and then we
| | 02:09 | can also give a hint.
| | 02:12 | Click Next, and we'll have our new account.
| | 02:15 | Last option is, is this a child's
account where we can go to turn on family
| | 02:20 | safety and get reports of their PC use.
| | 02:23 | This person is not a child, I'm going
to leave that unchecked and we'll talk
| | 02:27 | about child accounts a little bit later on.
| | 02:29 | So we'll click Finish, and
now there's a new account.
| | 02:32 | If we wanted to change any of that
information, you could go down there and try
| | 02:36 | to click it and we can't
actually access that account.
| | 02:39 | We just see it, and we could add
more accounts if we wanted to from here.
| | 02:44 | So let's go out of our PC settings here,
I'm just going to press my Windows key
| | 02:48 | on the keyboard to return to the Start screen.
| | 02:51 | Let's go to the Desktop now.
| | 02:52 | When we go down to the bottom left-hand
corner we see that start icon, we can
| | 02:57 | right click and go to Control Panel.
| | 03:00 | From here, we're going to go into
our User Accounts and Family Safety.
| | 03:03 | So that's another way to
get to our User Accounts.
| | 03:07 | There it is right at the top, I'll
click the heading User Accounts and
| | 03:11 | you'll see your own account and you can do
things like make changes to the PC
| | 03:15 | settings, the account type or we could go to
another account by clicking Manage another account.
| | 03:22 | So let's do that.
| | 03:24 | Here's where we'll see all of the users
including the one we just set up, Karen.
| | 03:28 | It's a local account, when I
click it, I see that information.
| | 03:31 | Then, I have a number of options down
the left-hand side, maybe I misspelled
| | 03:35 | Karen, I spelled it a different way, I
could change the name, I could change
| | 03:39 | the password from here.
| | 03:41 | There's access to setting up family
safety, so maybe initially I didn't
| | 03:45 | choose it as a child account so I
didn't get to set this up, I can come back
| | 03:49 | here at anytime and do it.
| | 03:51 | We will do this a little
bit later in this chapter.
| | 03:53 | Changing the account type, well, we
didn't really get an option to choose the
| | 03:57 | types, so let's click this link.
| | 03:58 | Here's where you see that the
default is actually a standard account.
| | 04:02 | So they can use most software, change
system settings that don't affect other
| | 04:05 | users on computer or device.
| | 04:08 | As an administrator though, you
would be giving them access to the
| | 04:12 | administrator tools.
| | 04:13 | So that means, we would have
to click Change Account Type.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to leave it at standard.
| | 04:17 | I want to be the only administrator here.
| | 04:20 | All right, let's click the Back button
up here in the top of left corner and
| | 04:24 | you'll see that there is another
option here and that is to delete the
| | 04:28 | account all together.
| | 04:29 | So a user leaves, they're no longer
going to be working on this computer or
| | 04:33 | device, we can click Delete the account.
| | 04:35 | If they've been using it for a while
they will have accumulated a number of
| | 04:39 | files, so we can delete those
files or choose to keep them.
| | 04:43 | I'm going to click Delete Files, Delete
Account and there's no longer a Karen account.
| | 04:49 | So I can close this up, hit the
Windows key to go back to our Start screen.
| | 04:54 | That's a quick look at User Accounts.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Securing your account with passwords and pins| 00:00 | When it comes to password protection
Windows 8 has some additional security
| | 00:04 | built in to it and we're
going to take a look at it now.
| | 00:07 | We'll do this by accessing our Settings.
| | 00:09 | Let's use the keyboard shortcut Windows+I.
Next we'll click at the very bottom
| | 00:14 | right corner on Change PC Settings.
| | 00:17 | This takes us into our settings
and we're going to go to Users.
| | 00:21 | Here's where we access our passwords.
| | 00:24 | You'll notice there are a
numbers of different sign-in options.
| | 00:27 | One, we can change our password, that's
what we type in when we login to the computer.
| | 00:32 | So if we click Change your password,
you'll need to know you current password
| | 00:36 | before you can change it to something else.
| | 00:38 | So you type that in, enter your new password
twice, hit Next and you're done. That's standard.
| | 00:44 | But there's some new functionality,
we're going to take a look at,
| | 00:47 | so let's click Cancel.
| | 00:48 | Here's something called
Create a Picture Password.
| | 00:51 | This is very useful for touch devices,
touchscreens, tablets for example,
| | 00:56 | but we can do it here on the computer.
| | 00:58 | Let's click Create a picture password.
| | 01:01 | First of all, you'll need to confirm
who you are by entering the password you
| | 01:04 | use currently to login, so we'll type that in.
| | 01:09 | When you hit Enter, notice you're
now at the very first step and that is
| | 01:14 | choosing the picture that you're going to use.
| | 01:16 | A picture password is not just simply a
picture, but it's a picture where you're
| | 01:21 | actually drawing things on the picture.
| | 01:23 | It could be circles, straight lines or taps.
| | 01:26 | So let's choose our picture first.
| | 01:28 | If you have the Exercise Files, you
can go in there and find one of the
| | 01:31 | pictures that is included.
| | 01:34 | I'm going to go to this
one here called Gallery2.
| | 01:37 | Give it a click and click Open.
| | 01:40 | So that's the first step, selecting
the picture you're going to use as
| | 01:44 | your picture password.
| | 01:45 | Next, we have to actually create the drawings.
| | 01:48 | So yes, we'll use this picture, give that a
click and you'll see here one, two, three.
| | 01:54 | There are three things we need to add
here and they can be any combination of
| | 01:57 | circles, straight lines and taps.
| | 02:01 | So let's go over here to the right.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to draw a circle
right around this circle.
| | 02:08 | You can see it flash there for a moment.
| | 02:10 | Then I'm going to go to this man's
eye and draw a straight line to it.
| | 02:15 | Third, I'm just going to
tap right in the center.
| | 02:17 | Now, you can see what's happened over here.
| | 02:19 | I went through the three steps to
finish setting up the picture password.
| | 02:23 | Now I just have to repeat that
to make sure I'll remember it.
| | 02:26 | So let's do it again.
| | 02:27 | We draw our circle.
| | 02:29 | We draw the line from the eye to the
circle and then we tap in the center.
| | 02:36 | If it's close enough, you'll see this
message saying that you've successfully
| | 02:39 | created your picture password and
that's what we're going to use the next time
| | 02:43 | we sign-in to Windows.
| | 02:44 | So we'll click Finish, and we're done.
| | 02:48 | Now you'll notice something has
appeared here under our Users Settings
| | 02:51 | in the sign-in options.
| | 02:53 | We now have the ability to remove a
picture password, if we no longer want to use it.
| | 02:58 | But like I said, it's
very handy for touch devices.
| | 03:01 | I'm going to click Remove
and it's no longer my password.
| | 03:05 | I'm back to using my text password.
| | 03:08 | There's another option here which is
Create a PIN just like you would with a
| | 03:12 | bank card, for example.
| | 03:13 | Again, you'll have to enter your
current password, and click OK or press Enter.
| | 03:21 | Now you can enter a PIN and it's a
quick as you can see, a convenient way to
| | 03:25 | sign-in to the PC using a four digit code.
| | 03:28 | So I'm going to do that.
| | 03:29 | I don't see what I'm typing,
but I do need to confirm that.
| | 03:34 | If I click Finish, and I've typed them
both in exactly the same way, I'll see a
| | 03:39 | Remove option now next to Change PIN.
| | 03:42 | As you can see that might be a faster
way for me to sign-in just put in those
| | 03:45 | four digits, four digits I'll easily remember.
| | 03:48 | Again, if I want to go back to my
original password, I click Remove and it's
| | 03:53 | no longer how I login.
| | 03:54 | Notice also there's a setting here so
that any user who's going to use this PC
| | 04:00 | after it's fallen asleep, in other
words, when they go to wake it up, they'll
| | 04:03 | need to enter their password and you
can see the setting up here is that any
| | 04:07 | user here who has a
password does have to enter it.
| | 04:10 | If you don't like that, you can change it.
| | 04:12 | Clicking Change will take you to the options.
| | 04:15 | You could see, "If you change this
setting," that means anyone can wake the PC
| | 04:18 | without having a password, meaning,
if it's sleeping in your account that's
| | 04:22 | what they're accessing.
| | 04:23 | So click OK and then we probably
want to go and change that back.
| | 04:27 | Click Change and you can see the
message now says, they will have to use it.
| | 04:32 | So that's a quick look at passwords,
PINs, picture passwords, some new
| | 04:36 | functionality built into keep your
account secure here in Windows 8.
| | 04:40 | Let's press our Windows key
to go back to the Start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using parental controls to block unwanted content| 00:00 | If you're a parent who has a computer
and children using that computer there are
| | 00:05 | parental controls that you can set up
to restrict what they're accessing, even
| | 00:08 | monitor what they're doing on the PC,
and that's what we're going to look at
| | 00:13 | right now here in Windows 8.
| | 00:14 | It's called Family Safety.
| | 00:15 | So if we wanted to search for it as
opposed to navigating through Control Panel,
| | 00:20 | we could use our Search charm by
going to the top or bottom right corner.
| | 00:23 | When the charms appear click
Search, and let's type in Family.
| | 00:28 | When we do that you won't find any apps,
but if we go to settings, sure enough
| | 00:32 | there's Family Safety right there.
| | 00:34 | In some versions of Windows 8 you
won't see these two choices, but you can
| | 00:38 | try typing the word parental in the
search field to get to one of these
| | 00:42 | options under Settings.
| | 00:44 | Either one of these will take you to
the same location to set up Family Safety
| | 00:48 | for end user including
users that don't exist yet.
| | 00:51 | So when we arrive at Family Safety and
you can see it's under User Accounts and
| | 00:55 | Family Safety in Control Panel, you'll
see existing accounts. I only have mine.
| | 01:00 | And if I wanted to I could
create a new account on the fly here.
| | 01:03 | So that's what I'm going to do, create a
new user account for my kids to use and
| | 01:08 | it could be for all of my kids or an individual.
| | 01:10 | I can use their e-mail address if they
have one so they can login or like we
| | 01:15 | did earlier have them sign in without
a Microsoft account and create what we
| | 01:19 | call a Local Account.
| | 01:21 | So we'll give that a click.
| | 01:23 | So in this case maybe my child's name is Karen.
| | 01:27 | I'll give them a password.
| | 01:30 | I need to re-enter that since I don't
see what I'm typing, just to make sure
| | 01:33 | I typed what I thought I was, and supply a hint.
| | 01:37 | When we click Next, there's where we get to
choose whether or not this is a child's account.
| | 01:42 | By clicking the check box and clicking
Finish we now have a new user and we can
| | 01:48 | access the Family Safety website.
| | 01:51 | So we can do that by clicking this at
the very bottom or we can go to their
| | 01:55 | account, select it, and you'll see a
number of different options that can be
| | 02:00 | set up for this user.
| | 02:02 | So for example Family Safety is on
because of the check box and it's going to
| | 02:07 | enforce the current settings.
| | 02:09 | Notice also that activity reporting is
turned on by default, because we checked
| | 02:12 | that box, collecting information about PC usage.
| | 02:16 | Now the settings down below is where we
can get into Web filtering, setting Time
| | 02:21 | limits for our kids, application
restrictions, and restrict what they're able to
| | 02:26 | access at the Windows Store and
set up game restrictions as well.
| | 02:30 | It's just a matter of going to those links.
| | 02:32 | So let's start with Web filtering, for example.
| | 02:34 | By default, Karen can use all websites
or I can click the next radio button and
| | 02:39 | choose the websites that
I will allow Karen to use.
| | 02:43 | So I can do that by clicking Set Web
Filtering Level or go down to allow or
| | 02:48 | block specific websites.
| | 02:50 | So I can have a list of multiple sites
that are blocked and I can also have a
| | 02:54 | list that will list all of the
sites that are allowed for Karen.
| | 02:58 | I'm going to go to Set Web Filtering
Level though, and you can see right now the
| | 03:02 | default is to Online Communication.
| | 03:05 | I'm going to go Designed for children.
| | 03:07 | This is a very young user.
| | 03:09 | You can see for this setting, the child
can view websites on the Allow list and
| | 03:12 | websites Designed for children.
| | 03:14 | That means I'm done with this
particular setting and I can go back.
| | 03:19 | Now when I go to my Allow list, I can go
in here just type in the website, maybe
| | 03:24 | lynda.com is a good one to allow.
| | 03:27 | It goes to the Allowed websites and I
can continue doing that choosing websites
| | 03:32 | that I want to allow or block by
choosing the appropriate button.
| | 03:36 | When I'm done, we can just go back by
clicking the Back button and now we've set
| | 03:40 | up some customized settings
for this particular child.
| | 03:43 | Now as time evolves, of course, we can
come in here and start making changes,
| | 03:47 | maybe allowing certain sites, turning
off sites that are blocked, but you always
| | 03:51 | have access to the Family Safety
Settings here from Control Panel in Windows 8.
| | 03:57 | So let's close this up and go back to
our Start screen by pressing the Windows
| | 04:01 | key on your keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Encrypting a drive with BitLocker| 00:00 | One of the securest ways to protect
any kind of data is to encrypt it.
| | 00:04 | Here in Windows 8 we still have access
to something called BitLocker Encryption
| | 00:08 | which means we have the ability
to select a drive and encrypt it.
| | 00:12 | So only people with the password will
be able to decrypt it and understand
| | 00:16 | what's on the drive.
| | 00:17 | We're going to take a look at it now.
| | 00:18 | It's not one of the new Metro
style apps here in Windows 8.
| | 00:22 | So let's go to the top or bottom right
corner and when we see the charms, click Search.
| | 00:27 | All we really need to type here is bit
and you'll notice under Settings when we
| | 00:32 | click Settings, we have access
to BitLocker Drive Encryption.
| | 00:36 | Manage BitLocker will take us to the same spot.
| | 00:39 | So let's choose either one of those.
| | 00:41 | And this opens up a window under System
and Security of the Control Panel called
| | 00:46 | BitLocker Drive Encryption.
| | 00:48 | Here you're going to see a list of
your drives including the operating system
| | 00:51 | drive, mine is labeled C. Notice this
area has been expanded, the arrow is
| | 00:55 | pointing up, and that shows me access
to Turn on BitLocker, but only if I have
| | 01:00 | administrator access.
| | 01:02 | That's what this little icon means.
| | 01:04 | Down below it looks like I have a
removable data drive also connected to this
| | 01:08 | computer and you can see BitLocker is
turned off by default there as well.
| | 01:12 | I can expand that section to get
access to turning on BitLocker.
| | 01:16 | Notice I don't need administrator access here.
| | 01:20 | So just to save time I'm going to go to
Turn on BitLocker right here next to my
| | 01:25 | removable data drive giving that a
click opens up a separate window.
| | 01:30 | It just takes some moment
to initialize the drive.
| | 01:33 | You wouldn't want to remove the drive
while the initialization is happening.
| | 01:36 | That could corrupt the drive.
| | 01:38 | Now there's a couple of different
ways to have an encrypted drive unlocked.
| | 01:42 | You can use a password which is the
most popular fashion and then down below
| | 01:46 | if you have a smart card reader and you
use smart cards, we slip it into the reader.
| | 01:51 | That's another great secure option,
using a PIN to decrypt or unlock a drive
| | 01:57 | that has BitLock Encryption turned on.
| | 02:00 | Let's go to Use a password.
| | 02:02 | We'll enter our password.
| | 02:06 | You should be using uppercase,
lowercase letters, numbers, spaces and symbols.
| | 02:10 | You don't see what you're typing so you
do need to confirm that by re-entering it
| | 02:14 | and then click Next.
| | 02:17 | If the two passwords match, you're now
on to the next step which is, how do you
| | 02:22 | want to backup your recovery key?
| | 02:24 | If for some reason you forget a
password or lose a smart card, there's a
| | 02:27 | recovery key that will help you to get
into the drive and set those up again.
| | 02:31 | You can save it to your Microsoft account,
save it to a file, and you can choose
| | 02:35 | where that file is stored
or you even print it out.
| | 02:38 | The recovery key is not the password.
| | 02:40 | It's actually a key that will allow you to
get in and change the password, for example.
| | 02:44 | So let's save ours to a file.
| | 02:47 | When we click Save to a File, you
now get to browse to the location.
| | 02:51 | By default, it's going to go to
your documents and notice the filename,
| | 02:54 | BitLocker Recovery Key and then you'll
see a great big long string of numbers.
| | 02:58 | Let's accept the defaults and click Save and
now we're ready to move on to the next step.
| | 03:04 | We know that, because it does say up
here that the recovery key has been saved.
| | 03:08 | If we were to forget it, we can
use that to gain access to the drive.
| | 03:12 | So let's click Next. All right.
| | 03:14 | Now we get to choose how much of
the drive to encrypt and this is an
| | 03:18 | interesting feature.
| | 03:19 | Notice that if you're on a new PC, for
example, you won't have a lot of data
| | 03:23 | stored on the drive.
| | 03:24 | So in that case, encrypting the disk
space that has been used only will be a lot
| | 03:29 | faster and it is one of the best options
for new PCs and drives or we could just
| | 03:34 | choose to encrypt an entire drive that's
been used for a long time, for example.
| | 03:38 | There are a lot of files on there,
deleted files that are hidden, all of it's
| | 03:43 | encrypted, if we chose to
encrypt the entire drive.
| | 03:45 | It will take longer, but
everything is protected.
| | 03:50 | Let's go to Encrypt Used Disk Space
for the sake of time and click Next.
| | 03:54 | Are you ready to encrypt the drive?
| | 03:56 | You'll be able to unlock it using the
password, and if you save the recovery key.
| | 04:00 | That's your only way back in if you forget it.
| | 04:02 | It might take awhile
depending on the size of your drive.
| | 04:05 | Larger hard drives of course will take much
longer than a small USB drive like I have attached.
| | 04:11 | Until encryption is complete you
should never disconnect the drive,
| | 04:16 | so your files will not be completed if you
do that and might even be corrupted.
| | 04:21 | So let's start encrypting by
clicking the Start Encrypting.
| | 04:24 | You'll see a status bar go by.
| | 04:25 | Now I'm using a very tiny drive.
| | 04:27 | You can see that BitLocker encrypting
is turned on and now I have a number of
| | 04:31 | different options over here.
| | 04:33 | Also, down at the bottom
you can see what's happening.
| | 04:36 | The process did take a little bit longer
than what would've appeared on the screen,
| | 04:39 | but we can click this to see the message
that it is indeed complete and close it up.
| | 04:45 | There we go.
| | 04:46 | So if we wanted to backup that
recovery key, we could do that.
| | 04:49 | If you want to change the password,
remove the password, or switch over to a
| | 04:52 | smart card, all of that is possible from here.
| | 04:55 | There's something called auto unlock.
| | 04:57 | So depending on the user, you may not
need to enter the password and we can turn
| | 05:01 | BitLocker off from here if we no
longer want the drive to be encrypted.
| | 05:06 | So I'm going to go to turn off BitLocker.
| | 05:08 | Eventually, you may want to
do that for an encrypted drive.
| | 05:11 | You'll need to confirm by
clicking the button again.
| | 05:13 | You could see it's decrypting the drive now.
| | 05:15 | It'll take just as long as
it did to encrypt the drive.
| | 05:18 | Eventually, once it's completed we'll
be back where we started with the drive
| | 05:24 | that's no longer encrypted.
| | 05:25 | But it's a great feature if there are
drives and content on those drives that
| | 05:29 | need to be protected, remember you
have BitLocker Encryption built-in to
| | 05:32 | Windows here in Windows 8.
| | 05:34 | We'll close this up and press the
Windows key to go back to our Start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Encrypting File System (EFS) to encrypt select folders and files| 00:00 | Sometimes it's not necessary to
encrypt an entire drive like we did in
| | 00:04 | the previous lesson.
| | 00:05 | You may only want to
protect certain files or folders.
| | 00:08 | That, too, is possible here in Windows 8
using EFS, Encrypting Files System.
| | 00:13 | We're going to look at that now by going
directly to our old desktop environment
| | 00:17 | by clicking the Desktop tile.
| | 00:19 | Let's start with individual files.
| | 00:20 | If you have the Exercise Files, double-click
the folder to open it up in File Explorer.
| | 00:25 | Now we could go picking and
choosing the files we want to encrypt.
| | 00:29 | Let's say, it was all of them.
| | 00:31 | Well, click the first one, point to the
last one, hold down your Shift key while
| | 00:35 | you click the last one,
and everything is selected.
| | 00:37 | You could use Ctrl+A as a keyboard
shortcut to select them all as well.
| | 00:41 | Now to get to their properties we
could right-click anyone of them and choose
| | 00:45 | Properties from the pop-up menu, but
we now have properties on the ribbon,
| | 00:49 | so clicking the Properties dropdown
shows you we can add or remove properties.
| | 00:53 | We want to go to the properties.
| | 00:55 | So choose it and from here
we're going to click Advanced.
| | 00:59 | It's here where we see
encrypt contents to secure data.
| | 01:03 | By clicking that check box and
clicking OK, we're ready to start the
| | 01:08 | encryption process.
| | 01:09 | But watch what happens when you click Apply.
| | 01:11 | It doesn't take long before each of the
files turns a different color in the background.
| | 01:20 | In fact, if we go back to the
Advanced button, you'll notice that it's now
| | 01:24 | checked off next to Encrypt Contents.
| | 01:27 | So let's click Cancel and then Cancel
again and you now have encrypted files.
| | 01:32 | Meaning only you will have access to them.
| | 01:34 | If anyone else goes into your computer,
logging in with access to these files,
| | 01:39 | they will not be able to see their contents.
| | 01:42 | Now of course we can decrypt them just
like we encrypted them by clicking the
| | 01:45 | first one, Shift+Clicking the last one.
| | 01:49 | Let's right-click this time and go to
Properties and when we click Advanced,
| | 01:54 | we now can deselect the check box,
click OK, and then click OK again.
| | 01:59 | It just takes a moment before each
of the files goes from green to their
| | 02:04 | original color, black text,
indicating they're no longer encrypted.
| | 02:09 | So that's individual files.
| | 02:11 | For an entire folder, all we
have to do is select the folder.
| | 02:14 | Let's go to Desktop here, select
Exercise Files, and then go up to Properties,
| | 02:20 | click Properties again, and when we
go to Advanced, by choosing Encrypt
| | 02:25 | Contents to Secure Data and clicking
OK, we'll be encrypting the entire folder
| | 02:31 | when we click Apply or OK.
| | 02:35 | But let's just click Cancel and
close up File Explorer and return to our
| | 02:38 | Start screen by pressing the Windows
key on your keyboard and we'll continue
| | 02:42 | from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Printing Printing files directly from Windows| 00:00 | When you need to print a file you
can save some time by printing it
| | 00:03 | directly from Windows 8.
| | 00:05 | In other words, you don't need to
launch a program to open up the file and
| | 00:09 | print it from there.
| | 00:11 | A Word document does not need
Microsoft Word to be printed.
| | 00:14 | Or if you're printing a photo, you
don't need to open up one of the Photo Apps
| | 00:18 | to print it from there.
| | 00:19 | You can do it all from File Explorer.
| | 00:21 | That's what we're going to do right
now by going to the Desktop tile on our
| | 00:25 | Start screen, give it a click.
| | 00:26 | Next, we'll find the Exercise Files.
| | 00:28 | Mine are right on the Desktop.
| | 00:29 | So double-clicking the folder opens up
File Explorer where I see a list of my
| | 00:33 | different files and file types.
| | 00:35 | Now some of these, of course, we would
never print, a video file, an MP3 file,
| | 00:40 | but we might print a PDF, we might
print one of these image files as well.
| | 00:45 | Let's go to Gallery1, for example,
and just click it once to select it.
| | 00:50 | If we wanted to print this out for
somebody, all we need to is go to the Share
| | 00:54 | tab on the ribbon and
then choose Print from there.
| | 00:58 | Another option is to simply right-
click the file itself and choose Print
| | 01:02 | from the pop-up menu.
| | 01:03 | Either way, you're going to see the same
thing which is the Print Pictures dialog
| | 01:08 | with a number of print options at
your disposal, as well as a nice little
| | 01:12 | preview of what you're going to get.
| | 01:14 | So there is our image
using the default settings.
| | 01:17 | Now if you have a printer connected, just
click the Printer dropdown and select it.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to choose my HP Photosmart Printer.
| | 01:24 | Now that may look a little bit different,
for example, there's a slight border.
| | 01:28 | It won't print right to the edge of the paper.
| | 01:30 | But notice down below we
have some options selected.
| | 01:33 | By default, one copy, but also the
checkmark in the check box next to
| | 01:37 | Fit Picture to Frame.
| | 01:38 | So it's going to be resized automatically
based on my selections here such as the Paper size.
| | 01:44 | By default, I'm seeing Letter, clicking
the dropdown allows me to choose from
| | 01:47 | some other presets as well as a More
option for choosing custom configurations.
| | 01:53 | I'm going to leave Letter selected.
| | 01:56 | The quality for this printer and this
particular image for me is set to 600x600.
| | 02:01 | Now depending on the printer you have
selected, you may see other options here.
| | 02:06 | This is my only option.
| | 02:08 | Also, the Paper type can be selected.
| | 02:10 | If you're going to put photo paper into
you printer to get a better result, you
| | 02:14 | can click the dropdown and again based
on your printer selection, you'll see
| | 02:18 | some paper types to choose from
such as HP Premium Plus Photo Papers.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to select that.
| | 02:25 | Over to the right-hand side we
also have some configurations.
| | 02:29 | By default, you're
looking at a full page layout.
| | 02:32 | But if you actually want it for smaller
copies, let's say, you could scroll down
| | 02:35 | the list here and find, for example,
there's one with 3.5x5-inch copies.
| | 02:42 | That would allow me four on one page.
| | 02:44 | Now all I need to do is
bump up the copies to four.
| | 02:48 | I'm going to click the up arrow until I
see 4 and just wait a second to preview
| | 02:52 | what that's going to look like.
| | 02:54 | You can see it doesn't take up a
full sheet of paper, but I will end up
| | 02:58 | with four nice copies.
| | 02:59 | When I'm ready to print, I click
the Print button and off it goes.
| | 03:04 | So we'll click Cancel.
| | 03:05 | Now this works for all kinds of different
files, text files, documents, images,
| | 03:11 | and of course, we can open these
up in their native programs just by
| | 03:15 | double-clicking them and printing from there.
| | 03:17 | But why not save yourself a few clicks
and print directly from File Explorer?
| | 03:20 | We'll close it up, press the Windows
key on your keyboard, and return to
| | 03:26 | the Start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing files to the XPS format| 00:00 | When printing files directly from Windows 8,
you have the ability to print to a
| | 00:05 | read-only format known as XPS.
| | 00:07 | It's the read-only format invented by Microsoft.
| | 00:11 | So if you want to share documents and
instead of printing them on paper, be able
| | 00:15 | to send them in a read-only format,
you can print directly to this format.
| | 00:19 | Here's how we do it.
| | 00:20 | Let's go to the Desktop
tile on our Start screen.
| | 00:23 | Now we'll go to the Exercise Files if
you have them or you can experiment with
| | 00:27 | any of your own files.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to double-click that
folder to open it up in File Explorer.
| | 00:32 | I'm going to take one of my images here
which could be edited in image editing
| | 00:36 | software unless I change it
to a read-only format like XPS.
| | 00:42 | Let's go to Gallery2 and when you
select it, you'll see a preview over here on
| | 00:46 | the right with some detailed information below.
| | 00:49 | If you still have the Details View
selected from the View tab above.
| | 00:53 | Now let's pretend we're about to print
this, but we don't want a paper copy.
| | 00:57 | We want a read-only copy.
| | 00:59 | But we do go to the Share tab like we
would anyway, click Print, and this time
| | 01:05 | we'll just make sure the printer
selected is Microsoft XPS Document Writer.
| | 01:10 | That may be your default and
that's already showing up.
| | 01:13 | But if you need to change it,
just click the dropdown.
| | 01:16 | You'll see a preview of it.
| | 01:18 | Now we can do other things like
changing its Paper size and Quality and Layout
| | 01:21 | just like we could when
printing to an actual printer.
| | 01:25 | But now when we click the
Print button, look what happens.
| | 01:28 | The Save Print Output As dialog
appears where we get to give it a name,
| | 01:33 | we'll keep the same file type that's
assigned by default which is OXPS,
| | 01:39 | read-only format, let's call this
Gallery2, and choose a location.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to save mine to the Desktop.
| | 01:46 | So I'll click Desktop and then click Save.
| | 01:48 | Notice it's not a Print button.
| | 01:50 | It's a Save button, but we're going through
the print process to print it to that format.
| | 01:55 | The location where we chose to save it to,
we'll see that file in the new format
| | 02:01 | and we'll be able to look at it using
programs like our XPS Viewer or here in
| | 02:05 | Windows 8, the default
program which is our Reader App.
| | 02:08 | So I'm going to close up File Explorer.
| | 02:12 | I see my Gallery2 file right here.
| | 02:14 | Notice the icon, the default app to
be used is the Reader App in Windows 8.
| | 02:19 | So when I double-click this,
it should launch the Reader App.
| | 02:22 | Sure enough there it is, and it'll just take a
moment for my image to appear in the XPS format.
| | 02:29 | There it is.
| | 02:30 | So I have my Zoom buttons to zoom out
and in if I wanted to, double-clicking it
| | 02:35 | in full-screen, right-clicking it gives
me the options to do things such as save
| | 02:41 | it to another location, open it in another app.
| | 02:45 | You can see more option here to rotate.
| | 02:47 | I need to rotate this and I may need
to rotate it more than once depending on
| | 02:52 | the direction it goes.
| | 02:54 | So I'll go back to More and click Rotate two
more times to get it in the right position.
| | 03:00 | One more Rotate and there we go.
| | 03:02 | So you can see it does rotate at 90
degrees at a time and now I might want to
| | 03:07 | save that using the Save As
option to save my changes.
| | 03:11 | But I do have a read-only format.
| | 03:12 | This is not an image like it was
before, a JPEG that could be edited using
| | 03:17 | image editing software.
| | 03:18 | It's just another way to share your
files by printing them directly to the XPS
| | 03:23 | format here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing and changing printer options| 00:00 | At first glance when printing directly
from Windows 8, it would seem that we
| | 00:04 | don't have full access
to the Printer Properties.
| | 00:07 | For example, if we wanted to print a
draft copy which is a lower quality,
| | 00:12 | maybe in black and white, where do we get to
those Printer Properties to customize them?
| | 00:16 | Well, I'm going to show you that right now.
| | 00:19 | First, we'll go to the Desktop by
clicking the Desktop tile to access
| | 00:22 | our Exercise Files.
| | 00:23 | Double-clicking that folder
will open them up in File Explorer.
| | 00:27 | Now you can really work
with any file you like here.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to work with the Swatch JPG
file and to print this, the shortcut is to
| | 00:35 | right-click, and choose
Print from the pop-up menu.
| | 00:39 | This, we have seen Print Pictures.
| | 00:41 | We can change our default printer,
the Paper size, the Quality, the Paper
| | 00:46 | type that we're using.
| | 00:47 | I'm going to go to Plain paper, for example.
| | 00:50 | But maybe I want to print a draft.
| | 00:52 | So a lower quality copy in black and white.
| | 00:54 | I don't see any of those options here.
| | 00:56 | However, I do see an Options link in the
bottom right corner. So let's go there.
| | 01:02 | You're first going to
see a couple of checkboxes.
| | 01:04 | Sharpening is turned on automatically.
| | 01:06 | So whenever you go to Print, if there
are issues with the photo or the file,
| | 01:11 | it will get sharpened.
| | 01:12 | If you don't like that, you can turn
it off by deselecting the checkbox.
| | 01:16 | Also, you're only going to see options
that are compatible with your selected
| | 01:19 | printer which is why your
options may look different than mine.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to leave that on.
| | 01:24 | I don't need to see all of the
options that don't apply to my printer.
| | 01:28 | Now we're going to get into some of the
customizable Printer Properties by going
| | 01:33 | to, there it is, the link
Printer Properties. Give it a click.
| | 01:36 | These are the properties we
typically access from other programs.
| | 01:40 | With Printing Shortcuts selected,
you're going to see a number of shortcuts
| | 01:44 | listed here that will change the
settings that we see on the right-hand side.
| | 01:48 | Just a little bit of a head start.
| | 01:49 | For example, if we're doing Photo
Printing Borderless and select that, you can
| | 01:53 | see what happens to the Paper size, it's
changed, the Paper type is changed, the
| | 01:57 | Quality is set to Best, et cetera.
| | 02:00 | If I have Two-Sided Printing I need to
do, I can go to that shortcut and you
| | 02:04 | can see some of the changes that happen
over here, like printing on both sides
| | 02:08 | is set to Manually.
| | 02:09 | That's for my particular printer.
| | 02:11 | Let's go to General Everyday Printing.
| | 02:13 | You can see now printing
on both sides is turned off.
| | 02:17 | But if I want to change things like the
Quality, which is set to Normal, I just
| | 02:21 | click the dropdown and I want to do a
Fast Draft that's going to use less ink.
| | 02:25 | Also, this little thumbnail tells me a
little bit about what's going to happen.
| | 02:29 | It's going to be in color.
| | 02:30 | I can see by the colors here.
| | 02:32 | If I want to change that to black-and-
white, but I don't see anything here,
| | 02:36 | but there is a Color tab up top.
| | 02:38 | Give that a click and we'll
change it to Print in Grayscale.
| | 02:42 | Look what happens to our thumbnail now.
| | 02:44 | We can also adjust the Quality
from here to choose Black Ink Only.
| | 02:49 | This is important, because if you leave
it at High Quality, you might actually
| | 02:53 | be using ink from the color cartridge
to create the grayscale image, and if you
| | 02:58 | only need the black ink and you only
want to use the black ink, it is a draft,
| | 03:02 | go there to save yourself some color ink.
| | 03:05 | So when we click OK we've then changed
those properties and we're back ready to
| | 03:10 | print and you'll see some
changes maybe on your screen.
| | 03:13 | Now you may not see a preview of the
way it's going to print unless you click
| | 03:16 | that checkbox, but you can always
go back and make changes to those
| | 03:20 | customized settings.
| | 03:21 | When you have what you
want you're ready to print.
| | 03:24 | Clicking the Print button will send it
off to your printer using those settings.
| | 03:28 | Let's just click Cancel and we'll
close up File Explorer and go back to our
| | 03:33 | Start screen by pressing the
Windows key on your keyboard.
| | 03:36 | So that's a quick look at how you
access those customizable Printer Options
| | 03:41 | available to you from most other programs,
but doing it directly from Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Troubleshooting and Backing UpMonitoring performance with Windows Experience Index| 00:00 | If you have concerns over the
performance of your computer, maybe it's running
| | 00:04 | a little slower than you'd like, maybe
graphics don't look right when you're playing games.
| | 00:09 | There is a performance tool that will
give us an actual assessment and a score
| | 00:14 | known as the Windows Experience Index
and we're going to look at that right now.
| | 00:19 | It'll identify areas for improvement.
| | 00:21 | The quickest way to get there is not
to go to the Desktop, then the Control Panel,
| | 00:24 | and try to find this, but
rather let's go to the top or bottom right
| | 00:28 | corner of our screen and when
the charms appear, click Search.
| | 00:33 | Now from here, all we have to do
is type in the word performance.
| | 00:37 | You will see an app known
as the Performance Monitor.
| | 00:40 | That's something different.
| | 00:41 | We're going to go to Settings over
here on the right-hand side and click and
| | 00:44 | here's where you'll see something that will
give us Performance Information and Tools.
| | 00:49 | That's what we're looking for.
| | 00:50 | It doesn't say Windows Experience Index,
but when we click it that's exactly
| | 00:55 | what you're going to see over
in the old desktop environment.
| | 00:58 | So Performance Information and Tools,
you can see as part of the Control panel.
| | 01:03 | Down below, if you'd never run this before,
you're not actually going to see any
| | 01:07 | scores at this time.
| | 01:08 | You're just going to see the
components and what is rated.
| | 01:12 | There will be a button to run this
assessment and at anytime, you can rerun the
| | 01:16 | assessment down on the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:19 | Notice the icon next to this link,
you do need to have administrator
| | 01:23 | privileges to run this.
| | 01:26 | Now it'll take a few minutes depending
on your hardware, but in the end, you
| | 01:30 | will see what I see here and that
is a subscore next to each of your
| | 01:34 | components and then a base score
which is determined by the lowest subscore
| | 01:39 | over here in this column.
| | 01:40 | You can see my score is fairly low,
it's a 2, knowing that as we look up here,
| | 01:45 | our components are assessed and
scored from 1 all the way up to 9.9.
| | 01:50 | So as I look at my processor,
not too bad, a 6 is pretty good.
| | 01:55 | Memory could be improved.
| | 01:57 | Definitely, I'm having issues
with my desktop graphics performance.
| | 02:01 | So I might need to upgrade to a better
graphics adapter, for example, that's why
| | 02:06 | I see a low score here next to 3D
Business and Gaming Graphics as well,
| | 02:10 | and my Disk data transfer rate
looks pretty good at 6.3.
| | 02:14 | We can get more detailed information
and even print it out by going to the link
| | 02:18 | right below this that says View and Print.
| | 02:20 | That opens up a separate window where we
see all of the scores again at the top.
| | 02:24 | But then we get more detailed
information as we scroll down below.
| | 02:28 | As you can see I've got some very
detailed information and if I go into the
| | 02:33 | Graphics area where I'm having some
problems, you could see maybe I should
| | 02:36 | update my graphics memory here.
| | 02:39 | My adapter, I could probably do better.
| | 02:42 | So all of this information is at my fingertips.
| | 02:44 | I can print the page by clicking the
button either at the bottom or at the top
| | 02:48 | of this page and have that
with me when I go shopping.
| | 02:52 | When we're done we just close it up.
| | 02:54 | Close up the Performance Information
and Tools window and let's press our
| | 02:57 | Windows key to go back to the Start screen.
| | 03:00 | So that's a quick way to assess your
computer's performance here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding issues in the Troubleshooting control panel| 00:00 | When it comes to your computer's
performance or a number of troubleshooting
| | 00:03 | tools built into Windows to not only
help you identify issues, but fix them on
| | 00:08 | the fly as well, we're going
to take a look at that now.
| | 00:11 | Let's start by going to the top or bottom
right corner in your screen and when
| | 00:15 | the charms appear click Search.
| | 00:17 | It's the quickest way to
find troubleshooting options.
| | 00:20 | We'll type in the word trouble.
| | 00:22 | There aren't any apps, but when we
go to Settings you're going to see a
| | 00:24 | number of options here.
| | 00:26 | On the left-hand side when you see this
icon of the cog you know that these are
| | 00:30 | Windows 8 apps that will run.
| | 00:33 | And they're very specific about
an issue that can be resolved.
| | 00:36 | But as we move over to the next column
we're going to see icons that will take
| | 00:41 | us back to the old desktop environment.
| | 00:42 | There's Troubleshooting,
Troubleshooting History, anything with the flag or
| | 00:47 | pendant means the Action Center,
something we talked about in a previous movie
| | 00:51 | and we can go to any of these and have
links to the others that we see here
| | 00:56 | directly from there.
| | 00:57 | So for example, if we did want to go
back to the Action Center and review
| | 01:01 | Computer Status and Resolve Issues, we
could click that link and from here,
| | 01:06 | see some information about our
security, our maintenance,
| | 01:10 | for example, anything in yellow
means there could be an issue.
| | 01:14 | But look down below, there's
Troubleshooting where we can and fix problems.
| | 01:17 | That was on the list and we
can go directly to it from here.
| | 01:21 | When we do this we're actually in the
Control Panel Troubleshooting section
| | 01:25 | where we can troubleshoot our computer problems.
| | 01:27 | It could be related to programs.
| | 01:29 | Programs that were made for previous versions
of Windows might not be running properly.
| | 01:33 | So we could find those issues
and try to resolve them from here.
| | 01:37 | Also, you could be having hardware issues.
| | 01:39 | Maybe you have headphones plugged in and
you're not getting any audio out of there.
| | 01:43 | You could troubleshoot audio playback.
| | 01:46 | A number of these as you can see
have the administrator icon next to them
| | 01:49 | indicating you have to have
administrator privileges to run them.
| | 01:53 | As we go a little further down, under
System and Security, maybe there's an
| | 01:57 | issue with Windows Update.
| | 01:58 | While we can click that link
directly to go right into the process of
| | 02:02 | troubleshooting that issue, notice also
there is an Advanced link down here and
| | 02:07 | when we click it, we can choose
to run this as an Administrator.
| | 02:12 | It might find more issues than if we didn't.
So we'll click that link to set that
| | 02:17 | up and then click Next.
| | 02:18 | You can see now it's going to try to
detect any problems with Windows Update.
| | 02:23 | It's going to stop a couple
of services and restart them.
| | 02:26 | Let's see what happens.
| | 02:27 | It looks like there was an issue here,
a problem was found, and it was fixed.
| | 02:32 | I know that by the checkmark in the green
circle over here on the right-hand side.
| | 02:37 | If I want detailed information about
what was actually wrong and what got fixed,
| | 02:41 | I can go to the link at the bottom,
click View Detailed Information, and I can
| | 02:45 | scroll down the list to see what went on.
| | 02:49 | If that's something I need a record of,
notice there's a Print icon here so
| | 02:53 | I can actually print that to a hard copy.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to click Next.
| | 02:57 | I'm back to where I started and I can
close this up now by clicking Close here
| | 03:01 | or Close the Troubleshooter from the
link just below the problems that were found.
| | 03:06 | Either way I'm going to close up that
window and that's a quick way to get to
| | 03:10 | some of the troubleshooting options
you have under Control Panel for checking
| | 03:13 | a wide range of issues that could be happening
with your computer and your computer programs.
| | 03:19 | Let's close this up and press our
Windows key on the keyboard to go back to
| | 03:23 | the Start screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fixing issues with the Problem Steps Recorder| 00:00 | Sometimes you come across issues
you simply can't resolve on your own.
| | 00:04 | You might need to get help.
| | 00:05 | Maybe it's a phone call to a support
line and in those cases they'll ask
| | 00:10 | you what's going on.
| | 00:11 | To really understand the problem it would
be great if they could see what's going on.
| | 00:15 | See the steps that got you to the issue.
| | 00:17 | There's something called the Problem Steps
Recorder here in Windows that will do just that.
| | 00:23 | We're going to take a look at it now.
| | 00:25 | Quickest way to find it is
just to go to our Search charm.
| | 00:28 | Let's go to the top or bottom right
corner of our screen and click the Search
| | 00:32 | charm when it appears
and type in the word steps.
| | 00:34 | You'll see something under Apps here
called the Steps Recorder. That's it.
| | 00:38 | If you go to Settings, you'll see
something worded different, Record Steps to
| | 00:42 | Reproduce a Problem, it's the
exact same tool. Give it a click.
| | 00:46 | It takes you back to the old desktop
environment and there's a tiny little
| | 00:50 | window here waiting for you to start recording.
| | 00:52 | So let's say our issue is we simply
can't print a certain type of file and the
| | 00:57 | support person wants to see what we see.
| | 01:00 | Well, let's turn on our recorder
by clicking the Start Record button.
| | 01:04 | Now everything we click and do will be recorded.
| | 01:07 | We can also add additional comments.
| | 01:10 | So let's go to the Exercise Files folder
for example, double-click it. There's a step.
| | 01:15 | You're going to see a little red
dot flash each time you click things.
| | 01:20 | Now as we go into our file, let's say we
select volunteer orientation letter and
| | 01:25 | we want to be able to print this.
| | 01:27 | So we go the Share tab.
| | 01:28 | Now you may need to move things out of the way.
| | 01:31 | Click Share and from here
you'll notice Print is not available.
| | 01:36 | So we might want to add a comment here.
| | 01:39 | Click that, we'll type in, Print button is
not accessible, and click OK. That's really it.
| | 01:49 | We can't print.
| | 01:50 | We'll click Stop Record and what
happens next is you'll see a list of the steps
| | 01:55 | and some information as well as some
options for passing this on to somebody.
| | 01:59 | For example, we could save it.
| | 02:01 | We could email it directly from here.
| | 02:03 | There are some keyboard shortcuts
like Alt+E for e-mail and Alt+V to save.
| | 02:09 | As we go down, you'll notice
that the file does contain steps.
| | 02:12 | If we're to save this, it will be a ZIP file.
| | 02:15 | There's our first step and
graphics to go along with it.
| | 02:19 | You can see we opened up File Explorer,
point it to our file, and selected it.
| | 02:25 | Next, when we click Share, we're
unable to access the Print button.
| | 02:30 | So it looks like there's a comment here
that was added, Print button is not accessible.
| | 02:36 | You can see it goes on through
each of the steps and then we get into
| | 02:39 | additional details.
| | 02:40 | We'll see a text recording now of
each of the steps including our comment.
| | 02:45 | This is something that we might want
to save and e-mail to somebody as an
| | 02:48 | attachment or e-mail it directly.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to click Save just to show you that
it is a ZIP file that's going to be created.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to leave it as my Desktop.
| | 02:57 | That's where it's going to be saved too.
| | 02:59 | I'm going to type in,
CantPrint_steps, click Save.
| | 03:06 | Now you can see it actually in
the background on my Desktop.
| | 03:10 | That's a file that I could send off
to somebody in the manner I choose.
| | 03:15 | So at this point, because we saved it,
we can close up the Steps Recorder and we
| | 03:19 | can close up anything else that's opened
and we have our file now, our steps in
| | 03:23 | a ZIP file that we can share with other people.
| | 03:26 | It could be support people who maybe
have never seen such a thing and will have
| | 03:30 | an idea how they can help us out.
| | 03:32 | Let's press our Windows key to go back
to the Start screen and that's how the
| | 03:36 | Problem Steps Recorder works here in Windows 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping file backups with File History| 00:00 | When you experience a system crash,
maybe physical damage to a computer,
| | 00:05 | will you have a backup of your
important files to use elsewhere?
| | 00:09 | Here in Windows 8, we can use File
History to create a backup of our important
| | 00:13 | files backing them up to an external
drive or a network drive, for example,
| | 00:18 | where we'll have access to them
to restore them should we need to.
| | 00:22 | If you want to follow along with me,
you can try plugging in a USB drive, if
| | 00:26 | you haven't got one already.
| | 00:28 | Any type of external drive or consider a
network drive to connect to for File History.
| | 00:33 | Now to access it, the quickest way here
from our Start screen is just to go to
| | 00:37 | one of the hot corners in the
top or bottom right-hand corner.
| | 00:40 | When the charms appear we'll
click Search and type in File History.
| | 00:45 | Now when we click Settings, you'll see
a number of options, File History, Save
| | 00:50 | Backup Copies, Restore Files, here's
where we'll go if we did have an issue.
| | 00:54 | But let's just go to File History right on top.
| | 00:57 | It takes us to our desktop environment.
| | 00:59 | You'll see the default is that File
History is off and by default it's going to
| | 01:04 | be copying files from your Libraries,
Desktop Contacts, and Favorites to a USB
| | 01:08 | drive if you have one connected.
| | 01:10 | If you don't have a drive, you'll need
to select a drive like a network drive.
| | 01:15 | So, for example, if we go to the left-hand
side, you'll see Select Drive. Give it a click.
| | 01:21 | If you have more than one USB
drive, for example, connect it.
| | 01:24 | You can select it from the list or
you could go to Add Network Location.
| | 01:29 | I'm fine with the one that's connected for me.
| | 01:31 | So I'm going to click Cancel, you can
select a drive of your choosing and then OK that.
| | 01:36 | I also have a message here saying that
File History has found files that are
| | 01:40 | encrypted and in this case it's on a
drive that doesn't use the file system
| | 01:46 | that's necessary and they won't be backed up.
| | 01:48 | So if there are any types of files that
can't be backed up, you'll see a message
| | 01:52 | like I have here, just reminding you.
| | 01:54 | We can also pick and choose folders to exclude.
| | 01:58 | In other words, we may have folders
that have files that we don't need to back
| | 02:02 | up and take up space.
| | 02:03 | Let's go to Exclude Folders.
| | 02:05 | By default, there aren't any, but we can
click the Add button to go in here and add some.
| | 02:09 | For example, I don't need to back up my music.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to click that and select that folder.
| | 02:16 | It's really a library, so anything
included in my music library is also included
| | 02:21 | as to be excluded from my File History backup.
| | 02:25 | Then you just repeat the
process for any other folders.
| | 02:28 | For example, I'm going to scroll down
here, take a look at any folders that
| | 02:33 | maybe I don't need my Exercise Files backed up.
| | 02:36 | I'll select that folder and it, too, is
included now as one of the folders that
| | 02:42 | will not be backed up.
| | 02:45 | I'll save those changes and now all
I really have to do is turn this on.
| | 02:49 | When we click Turn On,
File History is turned on.
| | 02:53 | It maybe saving copies right away and
you can see my File History is saving
| | 02:58 | copies of my files for the very first time.
| | 03:00 | I could stop that and I can turn this off at
anytime, but I'm going to let it do its thing.
| | 03:05 | Meanwhile, we can check out some
advance settings where you'll also find
| | 03:09 | out what the default settings are by
clicking Advanced Settings over here on the left.
| | 03:14 | First of all, copies of your files
are going to be saved every hour.
| | 03:17 | When we click the dropdown, we can change that.
| | 03:20 | Now for me I would say daily is enough,
but you can see there's an assortment of
| | 03:24 | options here for the frequency in
which your files are being backed up.
| | 03:28 | I'm going to choose Daily.
| | 03:29 | The Size of the Offline Cache, this is
an area that's going to use up some disk
| | 03:35 | space and it's just where
temporary files are stored.
| | 03:38 | We can increase or decrease
that from the default of 5%.
| | 03:41 | The files that are backed up,
how long are they saved for?
| | 03:47 | Well, the default is forever,
but we may run out of disk space.
| | 03:51 | So I'm going to click this dropdown and
choose Until Space is Needed then older
| | 03:55 | versions will be removed to create space.
| | 03:58 | I like that option.
| | 04:00 | We also have the ability to allow people
in our Homegroup to use this drive as well.
| | 04:05 | We can recommend this drive to our
homegroup members by clicking this checkbox
| | 04:10 | and they'll be able to do a
File History backup as well.
| | 04:12 | I don't actually want to do that.
| | 04:14 | I'm going to deselect that.
| | 04:16 | Eventually, we can access logs
to view recent errors or events.
| | 04:21 | Notice this is for administrator
access only and that is a link that appears
| | 04:25 | here under Advanced Settings.
| | 04:28 | If you do make changes, make sure you
click Save Changes which takes us back and
| | 04:33 | you can see there's still a copy going
on here and the amount of free space is
| | 04:37 | going down on my external drive.
| | 04:40 | So eventually, you could run into an
issue, you would have that external drive
| | 04:45 | or that network drive where, if you
needed to, you could restore your personal
| | 04:50 | files by clicking this link in File
History, access the drive, and they'll be
| | 04:54 | restored to locations on your new
computer or repaired computer for example.
| | 04:59 | So that's the File History, a nice
little feature that just keeps running in the
| | 05:04 | background without you even knowing it.
| | 05:05 | If something were to go wrong like a
system crash of even physical damage to a
| | 05:09 | drive, you could get your personal
files back, thanks to File History.
| | 05:14 | Let's just close this up
and let it do its thing.
| | 05:16 | We'll press our Windows key to go
back to the Start screen and continue
| | 05:20 | from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reversing a fatal crash with System Restore| 00:00 | Backing up files is good, but backing up can
also mean going back as in back in history.
| | 00:07 | There is a feature here that
allows you to set up a restore point.
| | 00:10 | So if something does go wrong, maybe
you've installed something or something
| | 00:14 | was installed without you knowing and
you want to go back to a point in time
| | 00:19 | when your system was working perfectly,
it involves setting up a Restore Point
| | 00:23 | and that's what we're going to do
right now by going to the top or bottom
| | 00:27 | right-hand corner of your screen, clicking the
Search charm, and we'll type in system restore.
| | 00:34 | When we click Settings you'll notice
over here in the left-hand side we can
| | 00:37 | create a Restore Point and all that
means is we can set up our system so that
| | 00:42 | if something does go wrong, we can go back
in time to a point when things were good.
| | 00:47 | So let's give it a click.
| | 00:48 | It takes us again to our System Properties
here in our old desktop environment
| | 00:53 | and you'll notice System Protection is selected.
| | 00:57 | So there's a number of different things here.
| | 00:58 | First of all, for System Restore to
work, you have to have a drive with
| | 01:03 | protection turned on.
| | 01:04 | You could see my Local
Disk drive here, System C:
| | 01:08 | has protection turned on.
| | 01:09 | If you see Off, you can click
Configure and turn it to On.
| | 01:15 | Also, down below you can see
the Disk Space Usage setting.
| | 01:18 | The maximum usage that you want to use
for system protection so that's a slider
| | 01:24 | that can be adjusted. Mine is set at 3%.
| | 01:26 | 3% to 5% is a good option.
| | 01:30 | Now when you click OK, you'll notice a
warning indicating that perhaps,
| | 01:36 | Some of your older restore points will be
deleted, are you sure you want to continue?
| | 01:39 | When you click Yes, you're all set to go.
| | 01:42 | Now down below, you'll notice that,
Create a restore point right now for the
| | 01:46 | drives that have a system
protection turned on, can be done.
| | 01:50 | So clicking Create will create a
Sytem Restore Point at this time.
| | 01:55 | So if everything is working perfectly,
clicking Create will create that Restore Point,
| | 01:59 | all you have to do
is put in the current date.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to type in October 17, 2012.
| | 02:08 | When I click Create, you can see it
doesn't take that long, but the Restore Point
| | 02:12 | will be created under System Protection.
| | 02:15 | So what does that mean?
| | 02:16 | Once it's been set up, all I have to do
now is restore the system when something
| | 02:22 | goes wrong and as you can see in the
background here in our System Properties,
| | 02:26 | when we close up our Restore Point
message, Sytem Restore is the button we click
| | 02:32 | to restore to a previous restore point.
| | 02:34 | So if you have many, you can click
this button, select the date that you want
| | 02:38 | to go back to, and we'll do that by
clicking Next, selecting the date,
| | 02:45 | clicking Next, and you'll notice some
information about what you're about to do and that
| | 02:50 | is to confirm the Restore Point, the date,
click Finish, and you're all restored.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to click Cancel, because
everything is running fine right now.
| | 02:58 | I don't need to go back to a restore point.
| | 03:01 | We'll click Cancel at this point to
close up that window, press our Windows key
| | 03:05 | to get back to our Start screen in
Windows 8, and that's a handy little feature
| | 03:09 | if something does go wrong and you
need to go back to a point in history when
| | 03:14 | everything was working fine, you can.
| | 03:15 | Just keep in mind that if, for example,
you've created files in-between that
| | 03:19 | restore point and now they could be
lost, but everything will be working
| | 03:24 | properly and if you've been backing up
your files like we did in the previous
| | 03:27 | movie, you won't have an issue.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Resetting your Windows 8 installation| 00:00 | If you're a long-time user of previous
versions of Microsoft Windows you may
| | 00:04 | have experienced something known as PC-rot.
| | 00:07 | That's where your system
just seems to slow right down.
| | 00:10 | You get to the point where you need
to uninstall Windows and reinstall it.
| | 00:14 | It's a lot of work.
| | 00:15 | It's very time consuming.
| | 00:16 | Well, there's a new feature here in
Windows 8 that allows us to reset without
| | 00:22 | having to go through all of that rigmarole.
| | 00:24 | There's a few different
ways of doing it as well.
| | 00:27 | So let's check it out.
| | 00:28 | It's in our PC Settings where
we'll find a couple of options.
| | 00:32 | So let's use the Windows keyboard
shortcut, Windows+I. Next, in the bottom
| | 00:37 | right corner we'll click Change PC Settings
and then over here on the left select General.
| | 00:44 | Now as we scroll down the General
Settings here on the right-hand side, we get
| | 00:48 | to an area known for Refreshing
your PC and Removing everything and
| | 00:53 | reinstalling Windows.
| | 00:55 | It's these two options
we're going to talk about.
| | 00:57 | For example, if everything is just wound
down to a grinding halt and you want to
| | 01:03 | reinstall Windows, you can remove
everything and reinstall Windows using
| | 01:08 | the Get Started button here.
| | 01:10 | All this is going to do is set your
PC back to the factory settings and you
| | 01:15 | will have to back up your files and put them
back, but it'll be like a fresh installation.
| | 01:21 | Now if you don't want to affect all of
your files, you can choose Refresh your PC
| | 01:25 | and in this case, clicking Get Started
here is actually going to seem to
| | 01:30 | reinstall Windows without
affecting all of your files.
| | 01:33 | So if you have documents, photos, music,
even your personal settings that you've
| | 01:37 | changed in Windows,
they'll all be restored as well.
| | 01:41 | And you might end up with a better running PC.
| | 01:45 | So those are the two options.
| | 01:46 | There is a third option as well which
we don't see here and that is if you have
| | 01:51 | an installation DVD.
| | 01:53 | You can pop it in the drive and it will
recognize that Windows 8 is already installed.
| | 01:59 | Because it is, you'll see an option to
repair which is the same as clicking
| | 02:03 | Get Started here under Refresh your PC
without Affecting Your Files.
| | 02:09 | We don't really need to do that right now,
but it's good to know you have these
| | 02:12 | options here if you experience
something we used to call PC-rot.
| | 02:16 | It's not as likely now here in Windows 8,
but if it does happen, you have those
| | 02:21 | options at your disposal.
| | 02:23 | Let's close this up by going to
the top when the hand appears.
| | 02:25 | Let's just click and drag it all the
way down to the bottom and release.
| | 02:29 | We're back to the Start screen and ready to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Internet Explorer 10Exploring the Internet Explorer 10 Metro-style user interface| 00:00 | In this chapter we're going to
focus on Internet Explorer 10. Why?
| | 00:04 | Well, one, because it comes with Windows
8 and two, because there's actually two
| | 00:09 | different versions of
Internet Explorer 10 to look at.
| | 00:12 | One, in the metro style, another
in the old desktop environment.
| | 00:17 | So let's begin with the tour of the UI
of the new Internet Explorer 10 in the
| | 00:21 | Metro style which has a tile
right here on the start screen.
| | 00:26 | Clicking this tile will launch IE10
and you're going to see a number of
| | 00:31 | differences from what you're
used to seeing in Internet Explorer.
| | 00:35 | One, as you look across the top,
you don't see a title bar, a menu bar,
| | 00:39 | favorites, et cetera.
| | 00:41 | All you're going to see is your home page.
| | 00:44 | Down at the bottom is where you're
going to see the address bar and you're also
| | 00:48 | going to see a series of buttons.
| | 00:50 | One for navigating.
| | 00:51 | So if you start moving through various sites,
you can move back using the Back button.
| | 00:56 | Over here to the right, you'll notice
a Refresh button to refresh any page
| | 01:00 | that you're looking at.
| | 01:02 | Then the push pin button which actually
allows you to pin this site to a couple
| | 01:07 | of different locations.
| | 01:08 | You can pin it to the start screen itself.
| | 01:11 | You can also pin it to the taskbar.
| | 01:13 | Next, you'll see a wrench.
| | 01:15 | This is where you go to access Page tools,
and then at the very far right you'll
| | 01:20 | see a button for moving forward through pages.
| | 01:23 | So if we wanted to go to lynda.com,
we could just click in the address bar,
| | 01:26 | and what's going to happen is you're
going to see some frequent sites and
| | 01:29 | favorite sites pop up.
| | 01:31 | This is how you get to those sites.
| | 01:33 | Now I don't see lynda.com as one
of my frequent or favorite sites.
| | 01:37 | So I need to type it in.
| | 01:39 | Now when I press Enter on the
keyboard, I'll be taken to that site.
| | 01:44 | Notice that I do have a
back button now that is usable.
| | 01:47 | So I can go back to the site I was at.
| | 01:49 | I also have, if we move up into the
page itself, arrows that appear on the left
| | 01:54 | and on the right-hand side
for navigating back and forward.
| | 01:57 | Now if we don't have a page to move
forward to, we won't see the arrow on the
| | 02:01 | right side, but we can definitely go back
using the arrow on the left side. Let's do that.
| | 02:06 | It'll take you back to your home page
and now as we move to the right-hand side,
| | 02:09 | there's the arrow that will allow us
to move forward to the page we were just at.
| | 02:15 | So that's a quick look at the UI.
| | 02:17 | Notice it's very clean,
there's not a lot going on.
| | 02:20 | Of course, it's a lot different when
we go to our old desktop environment and
| | 02:24 | look at Internet Explorer there.
| | 02:26 | So that's what we're going to do next.
| | 02:28 | Let's just close this up by moving to
the very top when you see the hand, click,
| | 02:32 | drag it straight down to the bottom,
and release, and we'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the Internet Explorer 10 desktop-style user interface| 00:00 | As I mentioned in the previous movie
there's actually two versions of Internet
| | 00:04 | Explorer 10 that come with Windows 8.
| | 00:06 | We've already seen the Metro style app
which has its own tile here on the start screen.
| | 00:11 | You won't find the tile to the desktop
version of IE10 and you can't actually
| | 00:16 | put one here either.
| | 00:17 | So we need to go to the desktop to explore
the user interface of IE10 in this environment.
| | 00:23 | Let's move down to the taskbar at the
very bottom where you will find Internet
| | 00:27 | Explorer and giving that a click
will take you to the desktop version.
| | 00:31 | It's more traditional.
| | 00:33 | More probably what you're used to seeing
in previous versions of Internet Explorer.
| | 00:37 | Of course, across the top is
where you'll find the address bar.
| | 00:41 | You may also see a menu bar, you may
not, but let's just right-click up here
| | 00:46 | anywhere to see checkmarks next to the
bars that are visible and no checkmark
| | 00:51 | next to the ones that aren't. So if
you want to turn on the Menu bar that's
| | 00:54 | something you like, just click it.
| | 00:56 | I like the Favorites bar, so I'm going
to choose it as well and you'll notice
| | 01:00 | the Favorites bar now shows up right below.
| | 01:02 | There's nothing on there yet.
| | 01:03 | If we haven't used it and haven't
saved any favorites, we won't see anything
| | 01:07 | except for this little icon way over
here on the left which means we can add the
| | 01:11 | current page to our Favorites bar.
| | 01:13 | Let's right-click again
and turn on the Command bar.
| | 01:16 | It shows up over here on the right-hand side.
| | 01:18 | I like this one, especially for my home
button which will take me to my Home page.
| | 01:23 | We'll right-click one more
time and turn on the Status bar.
| | 01:26 | It appears across the bottom of your
screen and you can do things like change
| | 01:30 | the zoom level from here.
| | 01:32 | So we do have back and forward buttons as well.
| | 01:35 | In the address bar we'll just click.
| | 01:36 | Everything is highlighted
so we can type right over.
| | 01:38 | Let's type lynda.com and when we press
Enter, we're taken to that page and now
| | 01:44 | the Back button is accessible.
| | 01:45 | So we can give it a click.
| | 01:47 | It'll take us back to our previous page.
| | 01:49 | Now we can go forward to lynda.com.
| | 01:52 | Let's try our home button here
by clicking it on the Command bar.
| | 01:56 | It takes us directly to our default Home page.
| | 01:59 | And if you haven't changed
anything MSN is your Home page here in
| | 02:03 | Internet Explorer 10.
| | 02:04 | You also have some buttons across the top here.
| | 02:07 | You'll notice a Home button here.
| | 02:09 | So you may not need the
Command bar like you used to.
| | 02:12 | We also have the star representing
favorites and here's where we go to view them
| | 02:15 | and we can access settings as well.
| | 02:17 | The little cog icon is where we go
to the tools and there are keyboard
| | 02:21 | shortcuts for each, Alt+X for the tools, Alt+C
for our favorites, and to go home is Alt+Home.
| | 02:27 | So that's how we navigate and change
our user interface here in Internet
| | 02:31 | Explorer 10 in the desktop environment.
| | 02:35 | There's much more we can do with
Internet Explorer 10 in both environments and
| | 02:40 | we'll continue with that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing sites quickly using favorites and history| 00:00 | Although we get two different versions
of Internet Explorer 10 here in Windows 8,
| | 00:04 | the desktop version we're looking at
from the previous lesson here as well as
| | 00:08 | the Metro style app.
| | 00:09 | The two are really connected.
| | 00:11 | In other words, if we do things like
set up favorites here in the desktop
| | 00:15 | version we'll see those in the
Metro style app. Let's experiment.
| | 00:18 | So we have Internet Explorer up.
| | 00:20 | We're looking at lynda.com here in the
desktop version of Internet Explorer 10.
| | 00:24 | We've turned on the Menu bar, the Command bar.
| | 00:27 | The Command bar has the
Home icon and a dropdown.
| | 00:30 | Let's click the dropdown and
go to Add or change Home page.
| | 00:35 | In this case, we want to use the current page.
| | 00:37 | So we'll click the radio button next to
Use this webpage as our only Home page.
| | 00:42 | We'll click Yes and it becomes our Home page.
| | 00:45 | Everytime we hit the Home button or click
the Home button up here on the Address bar,
| | 00:50 | we'll be taken to lynda.com.
| | 00:53 | Will that apply when we
go to the Metro style app?
| | 00:55 | We'll see momentarily.
| | 00:57 | Let's talk about favorites now.
| | 00:58 | If you have sites that you go to on a
regular basis, you can save some time by
| | 01:02 | making them favorites.
| | 01:03 | Then they're accessible from the
Favorites menu, they're also accessible
| | 01:07 | from the Favorites bar.
| | 01:09 | So if you've decided to view this bar
and add them there, it's a quick way
| | 01:13 | to jump between sites.
| | 01:14 | So let's add a site like lynda.com here.
| | 01:17 | We'll go to a different place.
| | 01:19 | We'll go to new releases
and make this a favorite.
| | 01:22 | We're always up on the latest releases
at lynda.com and we want to be able
| | 01:26 | to check frequently.
| | 01:27 | So we'll just go over here to the left-
hand side where you will see an Add to
| | 01:31 | Favorites Bar button, a little
star with the green arrow.
| | 01:34 | By clicking this, it's a little shortcut,
it gets added to our Favorites bar.
| | 01:38 | That's the same as going to Favorites and
choosing Add to Favorites Bar from here.
| | 01:42 | Of course, we can access anything
from this menu with regard to favorites.
| | 01:47 | Now we're going to flip over to the other
Internet Explorer and that's our Metro style app.
| | 01:52 | Let's press the Windows key on the
keyboard and click Internet Explorer right on
| | 01:56 | the tile here on our Start screen.
| | 01:58 | Notice the page that opens up.
| | 02:00 | It's your Home page, our new Home page
that we already set up in the other version.
| | 02:04 | What about favorites?
| | 02:05 | Let's just click anywhere
down here in the Address bar.
| | 02:08 | Over here on the right we're going to see some
favorites including, there it is, New releases.
| | 02:13 | So we can go directly to New releases
right from there by clicking it.
| | 02:18 | Favorites are a great way to jump
around to sites you like to visit frequently
| | 02:22 | and when you set them up in one version
of Internet Explorer 10 they show up in
| | 02:26 | the other version as well.
| | 02:28 | Now there's also something called History.
| | 02:30 | Now when we go over to our Address bar
here and click, we will see frequent sites.
| | 02:36 | These are sites that Internet Explorer
is tracking that we visit frequently.
| | 02:40 | It's kind of like a history.
| | 02:42 | What we're going to do now is just press
the Windows key and click the Desktop
| | 02:46 | tile to go back to Internet
Explorer in the desktop environment.
| | 02:50 | There's also a history
that's accumulating here as well.
| | 02:53 | You'll notice a little arrow up on the
Address bar next to the Magnifying glass
| | 02:58 | and when you click this you're going
to see a list of sites you've been to.
| | 03:02 | So you can go back to them quickly just
by selecting them from the History list.
| | 03:06 | It's a little bit different than Frequent
sites, but it does keep track of where
| | 03:10 | you've been, so if you do need to go
back to a site that you visited recently,
| | 03:15 | you can access it from the history list.
| | 03:17 | You'll also see your
favorites down here as well.
| | 03:20 | So we'll just click in the background.
| | 03:22 | Let's press our Windows key to go
back to our Start screen and we'll
| | 03:25 | continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing privately with InPrivate browsing| 00:00 | InPrivate Browsing is in an option in both
versions of Internet Explorer here in Windows 8.
| | 00:06 | If you share a computer with others and
you don't want them knowing which sites
| | 00:09 | you've been visiting or if you're
visiting sites and you don't want those
| | 00:13 | vendors, for example, to know
whether you've been there before InPrivate
| | 00:17 | Browsing is a good option.
| | 00:19 | We're going to take a look at it
first here in Internet Explorer
| | 00:22 | in our Windows 8 environment.
| | 00:23 | If you don't already have it running click
the Internet Explorer tile on the start page.
| | 00:27 | Now you'll arrive at your Home page
and by default, you're not using what's
| | 00:30 | known as InPrivate Browsing.
| | 00:33 | If you need to do InPrivate Browsing,
you'd actually need to open up a new tab.
| | 00:37 | To do that we'll right-click, up here
at the top you'll see any open tabs as
| | 00:42 | well as a couple of buttons of to the
right, one for creating a new tab so you
| | 00:47 | can have multiple pages
running at the same time.
| | 00:49 | But if you want InPrivate Browsing,
you actually have to go down to the Tab
| | 00:53 | tools button right below and give that a click.
| | 00:55 | From here you can create a new tab,
a New InPrivate tab that is.
| | 01:00 | So when you click it, you'll notice a
new page appears and you're ready to type
| | 01:04 | in the address down below.
| | 01:05 | Notice beside the flashing
cursor, you're in InPrivate mode.
| | 01:09 | So you can click one of your favorites
or frequent sites if you wanted to.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to go to Google and
you'll notice InPrivate stays on.
| | 01:18 | So anywhere I go now will not be
tracked in the history, nothing will appear in
| | 01:22 | my cache, there will be no cookies downloaded.
| | 01:26 | Same thing when going to sites
that maybe I have visited before.
| | 01:29 | I won't be sending out
information to those sites either.
| | 01:32 | When you want to close a tab,
remember you can right-click anywhere.
| | 01:35 | To see any open tabs, you'll see those
that are not InPrivate as well as those
| | 01:40 | that are and you can click
the X to close up those tabs.
| | 01:43 | Let's just press our Windows key to go
back to the Start screen and switch over
| | 01:47 | to the desktop where we'll launch
Internet Explorer 10 here from our taskbar.
| | 01:53 | If yours is already running, no problem,
we can access InPrivate browsing from
| | 01:57 | this version of IE10 as well.
| | 02:00 | To do that we'll just go up to Safety
here on the right-hand side, make sure
| | 02:04 | that you're actually viewing your Command bar.
| | 02:07 | You can do that by right-clicking up at
the top anywhere and ensure a checkmark
| | 02:11 | appears next to Command bar.
| | 02:13 | The quickest way then is to click
Safety and you'll see InPrivate Browsing.
| | 02:17 | At anytime you can also use the keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+Shift+P. So when we click
| | 02:22 | this you'll notice what happens.
| | 02:24 | We actually have a new page here
and we're looking at InPrivate mode as
| | 02:29 | indicated by the address bar up at the top.
| | 02:32 | So now it's just a matter of going to a site
and wherever we go we'll remain in this mode.
| | 02:37 | So you could type in the address, you
could go to your favorites for example,
| | 02:42 | go to one of your favorite pages and
InPrivate will show up at the top.
| | 02:46 | So that's how you use InPrivate
Browsing here in Windows 8 available in both
| | 02:50 | versions of Internet Explorer 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing Internet Explorer 10 Metro app properties| 00:00 | Accessing internet options from
Internet Explorer is done a little bit
| | 00:04 | differently depending on the
version you're working with.
| | 00:06 | So we're going to look at both right
now beginning with our start screen here
| | 00:10 | and the Metro style app Internet Explorer.
| | 00:13 | Give it a click if it's not already running.
| | 00:15 | Let's use the keyboard shortcut Windows+I.
Because we're already in Internet
| | 00:20 | Explorer, we see internet options
over here on the right-hand side.
| | 00:24 | We'll give that a click and you'll
notice it's quite a limited number of
| | 00:28 | settings we have access to here.
| | 00:30 | But any changes we make will affect
our desktop version and vice versa.
| | 00:35 | So let's start at the very top here.
| | 00:36 | You can see we can delete
our browsing history from here.
| | 00:39 | It may take a moment depending
on how much is in that history.
| | 00:43 | Also, permissions down below, sites can ask
for your physical location if this is turned on.
| | 00:50 | So if you want to see relevant information
displayed on websites using your
| | 00:54 | location, you might want to turn that on.
| | 00:56 | If you want to be a little
more private, leave it turned off.
| | 00:59 | We can also go down and clear any of the
location information using the clear button.
| | 01:04 | We have Zoom options here.
| | 01:06 | You can see zoom levels.
| | 01:08 | Something called Flip Ahead,
great with touchscreens.
| | 01:11 | That can be turned on to improve
the browsing experience when there are
| | 01:15 | multiple pages to a website.
| | 01:17 | Then Encoding as well can be turned on
automatically or turned off and when you
| | 01:21 | change that selection, you can see it
actually closes up the Internet options.
| | 01:25 | All that means is if you're having
difficulty reading text on your screen,
| | 01:29 | maybe it's not the right language,
encoding might be the issue, and having it
| | 01:33 | automatically selected for you
might improve that situation.
| | 01:36 | So that's all we have access to as far
as our Internet options for IE10 here in
| | 01:42 | the Metro style app.
| | 01:43 | Let's press our Windows key to go back
to the Start screen and we'll go to the
| | 01:46 | desktop version of Internet Explorer now.
| | 01:49 | You may already have it running like me.
| | 01:51 | If not just go down to your taskbar
and you can launch Internet Explorer.
| | 01:56 | To access the options here, if you have
the Command bar showing, you can go to
| | 01:59 | Tools and from the dropdown
select Internet Options.
| | 02:02 | If you don't have this visible right now,
you'll also notice the Tools button in
| | 02:06 | the very top right corner here of the screen,
just below the close button, Alt+X
| | 02:11 | is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 02:12 | We'll give it a click and
select Internet Options.
| | 02:15 | Now there are many, many more
options that we can set from here.
| | 02:18 | Again, changes we make here will
affect our Metro style app as well like
| | 02:23 | changing our home page.
| | 02:25 | Notice down below that we can delete the
browsing history from the Delete button
| | 02:29 | or have it deleted always
everytime we exit our browser.
| | 02:34 | So that's an option that we didn't see
in the Metro style app, although we were
| | 02:37 | able to delete our browsing history from there.
| | 02:40 | We can change appearance and then
we can get into things like Security.
| | 02:44 | We can get into Privacy.
| | 02:47 | This is sometimes an issue when sites
require cookies, for example, you may
| | 02:51 | need to change your settings lowering them
and then remembering to bring it back up after.
| | 02:56 | There's a Content tab.
| | 02:58 | Connections, if you wanted to set up
a new Internet connection from here.
| | 03:02 | Programs, we're going to be going into
that a little bit later and an Advanced
| | 03:06 | tab with many, many more
settings all at your fingertips.
| | 03:09 | A lot more available to you here in the
desktop version of Internet Explorer 10.
| | 03:13 | So we'll just click OK, in case we've
changed any of those settings and that's
| | 03:18 | how you access your settings.
| | 03:19 | Let's go back to our Start screen by
pressing the Windows key on your keyboard
| | 03:24 | and we'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Invoking Internet Explorer 10 desktop from Internet Explorer 10 Metro| 00:00 | If at anytime you're viewing a site
in Internet Explorer 10 using the Metro
| | 00:04 | style app and you wish you had access
to some of the tools, features, and
| | 00:08 | functions off the Desktop app,
you can invoke it at anytime.
| | 00:12 | That's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:14 | We'll go to our start screen here
and click Internet Explorer if it's not
| | 00:17 | already up and running.
| | 00:18 | Now maybe we want access to some of
the desktop features and functions that
| | 00:22 | we don't get here with the Metro style app
and we want to view this site on the desktop.
| | 00:27 | Well, it's pretty simple actually.
| | 00:28 | If you don't already see this
information across the bottom on the taskbar,
| | 00:32 | just right-click and that will go down to
the wrench which is actually our Page Tools.
| | 00:37 | Click there and you'll notice
an option to View on the Desktop.
| | 00:41 | Click this and you're actually taken to
the desktop, Internet Explorer 10,
| | 00:45 | the desktop version is launched, and
you're taken directly to that page.
| | 00:49 | So now you have access to all of those
features and functions you didn't have
| | 00:53 | in the Metro style app.
| | 00:55 | Let's close this up and go back to our
Start screen by pressing the Windows key
| | 00:59 | on the keyboard and we'll continue from here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding sites to the Start screen| 00:00 | If there are certain sites you like to
visit on a regular basis, you can create
| | 00:04 | a shortcut to them by placing a
tile directly here on the Start screen.
| | 00:09 | Clicking it will not only launch Internet
Explorer 10, but take you directly to that site.
| | 00:13 | So let's see how it's done.
| | 00:15 | We can do it from the Metro style
app as well as our desktop environment.
| | 00:18 | Let's begin by clicking Internet
Explorer here on our start screen.
| | 00:23 | Now let's say there's a
certain site that we go to daily.
| | 00:26 | Let's go to New releases,
for example, here at lynda.com.
| | 00:30 | Now if this is something we want to check
on everyday, maybe multiple times a day,
| | 00:34 | we can create a new tile on our
start screen by going down to the bottom
| | 00:39 | and clicking the push pin icon.
| | 00:41 | From here, clicking Pin to
Start will create that new tile.
| | 00:45 | So we'll give it a click and you can see
there's some default text that shows up.
| | 00:49 | It comes from the website, New
Releases software tutorials and so on.
| | 00:53 | We can change that, just click and
drag over it like I did and type in
| | 00:57 | lynda.com New Releases.
| | 01:00 | When you click Pin to Start, you've just
created a new tile on your Start screen
| | 01:04 | that will take you directly to this site.
| | 01:06 | So let's close this up.
| | 01:07 | We'll go to the very top when you see
the hand appear, just click and drag
| | 01:11 | straight down to the bottom.
| | 01:12 | Now as we scroll over, we'll find a new
tile has appeared, lynda.com new releases.
| | 01:18 | If want to place it in a more convenient
location, just click and drag it over.
| | 01:22 | I'll drag it over here.
| | 01:25 | Now I have access to a quick link that
will take me to Internet Explorer, but
| | 01:31 | I'll go directly, not to my Home
page, but to this site by clicking it.
| | 01:34 | Let's do that and sure enough it
opens up the lynda.com site looking at
| | 01:39 | our latest releases.
| | 01:41 | We can also do this from
the desktop environment.
| | 01:44 | Let's press our Windows key
to go back to the Start screen.
| | 01:47 | We'll click Desktop.
| | 01:49 | We'll launch Internet Explorer
from the taskbar, down at the bottom.
| | 01:54 | If yours is already running, no problem.
| | 01:56 | Let's choose a different site now.
| | 01:58 | Let's go to Support and How to use lynda.com.
| | 02:03 | Maybe we're learning how to use this site and
we want to come back to this on a daily basis.
| | 02:08 | This is an actual course on
how to use the actual site.
| | 02:11 | So what we're going to do is create a tile on
our start screen that will take us directly here.
| | 02:16 | To do that, we can go to the cog up at
the very top right-hand corner for Tools.
| | 02:22 | Alt+X is the keyboard shortcut and from
here, you'll see Add Site to Start Screen.
| | 02:28 | When you click this, you'll see again
some information, how to use lynda.com and
| | 02:33 | then down below where it's coming from.
| | 02:36 | We don't want to change that.
| | 02:37 | We'll just click Add.
| | 02:39 | Now that just got added to our Start screen
and it refreshes here displaying the page itself.
| | 02:45 | So let's go back to our Start screen by
pressing the Windows key on the keyboard
| | 02:49 | and we'll scroll over to see if there
is a new tab and sure enough there it is,
| | 02:53 | how to use lynda.com.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to drag that up and over to
the left next to my New Releases tile and
| | 03:00 | now I have another one that I can
access directly by clicking the tile itself.
| | 03:05 | Notice it also does take me to the
desktop where it was created and takes me
| | 03:08 | directly to that site.
| | 03:10 | Let's close that up.
| | 03:12 | Return to our Start screen by pressing
the Windows key on the keyboard and
| | 03:16 | that's how you create tiles that take
you directly to your favorite sites in
| | 03:20 | Internet Explorer 10.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making Internet Explorer 10 desktop the default| 00:00 | If you're like many people I have
spoken to about the new Internet Explorer 10,
| | 00:04 | you may not be so keen on the new
Metro style app, especially if you're not
| | 00:08 | using a touchscreen and you prefer to
do your work in the desktop version.
| | 00:12 | Well, one thing you might consider
then is to set that desktop version of
| | 00:16 | Internet Explorer 10 as your default.
| | 00:18 | So when you click a tile for example,
one of the tiles we pinned to our Start
| | 00:23 | screen or even the Internet Explorer
tile itself, you'll be taken to the Desktop
| | 00:27 | version where you'll have all of
those options and be working in a more
| | 00:31 | comfortable environment similar to previous
versions of Internet Explorer. How do we do it?
| | 00:36 | We have to go to the desktop
version to set up that default.
| | 00:40 | So click the Desktop tile and if you
need to launch Internet Explorer like I do,
| | 00:44 | just go down to the taskbar
and click the Explorer icon.
| | 00:48 | Now from here we're going to go to our Tools.
| | 00:51 | Let's go to the very top right-hand
corner just below the Close button and
| | 00:54 | click the Tools icon, Alt+X is your
keyboard shortcut and from here,
| | 00:59 | we'll select Internet Options.
| | 01:01 | Next, we'll go across to the Programs
tab and it's here where you'll see at the
| | 01:06 | very top what's going to happen when
you open links in Internet Explorer.
| | 01:10 | By default, Internet Explorer is going
to decide for you, will it open in the
| | 01:14 | Metro style app or this desktop version?
| | 01:17 | We'll click the dropdown and you can
choose your default such as Always in
| | 01:22 | Internet Explorer on the Desktop.
| | 01:25 | When you select that, that is for links.
| | 01:27 | So if we were to click a link at the
lynda.com site, now it will open in the
| | 01:32 | Desktop version even if we're in
the Metro style app when we do it.
| | 01:35 | But we can take it a step further by
clicking the checkbox right below which is
| | 01:39 | labelled Open Internet
Explorer Tiles on the Desktop.
| | 01:43 | So even the tiles from our Start
screen will take us to this Desktop version.
| | 01:47 | When we click Apply, we lock
in those settings. Click OK.
| | 01:51 | Let's close up Internet Explorer.
| | 01:52 | We'll go to the top right corner and
click the Close button and return to our
| | 01:56 | Start screen by pressing the
Windows key on your keyboard.
| | 01:59 | Now we can go to either of these
tiles that we've pinned or to the Internet
| | 02:03 | Explorer tile itself and click and
we'll be taken to the Desktop launching
| | 02:08 | Internet Explorer, the
Desktop version, everytime.
| | 02:12 | So that's how you set up
the default here in Windows 8.
| | 02:16 | Let's go back to our Start screen
after closing Internet Explorer by pressing
| | 02:20 | the Windows key on your keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionNext steps| 00:00 | Congratulations! You've reached the end of
Windows 8 Essential Training.
| | 00:04 | You should now be feeling more comfortable
in your new Windows 8 environment.
| | 00:08 | If you haven't already installed
Windows 8, this would be your next step.
| | 00:12 | Then using Windows Easy Transfer get
your old files moved over to Windows 8
| | 00:17 | in a similar configuration and
you're off to the races.
| | 00:20 | Install your old programs and remember,
if they're not Windows 8 compatible,
| | 00:23 | they'll run in the old Windows desktop
environment just as they always have.
| | 00:28 | Thank you for watching and I hope to
see you again soon in another title
| | 00:31 | from lynda.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
